acs-160 v1.1 harris

238

Upload: navicura

Post on 26-Mar-2015

323 views

Category:

Documents


9 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris
Page 2: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

© Copyright 2000 Harris Corporation.All rights reserved.

Intraplex T1 Access ServerInstallation and Operation ManualIssue 1, October 2000

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

WarrantyThe information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Intraplex makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Harris shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

Trademark CreditsIntraGuide™, IntraLink™, SecureLink™, and SynchroCast™ are trademarks of Harris Corporation. SECURENET™ is a trademark of Motorola, Inc. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

How to Contact UsHarris CorporationIntraplex Products4393 Digital WayMason, OH 45040USA

Phone: +1 513 459 3400

Fax: +1 513 701 5316

E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.broadcast.harris.com

How to Get SupportIf you have a technical question or issue with your Intraplex equipment, please check our customer support web site or call +1 217 221 7529.

You can also send e-mail to: [email protected]

Page 3: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Table of Contents

1.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

1.2 Manual Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

1.3 How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

1.4 Multiplexer Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

1.5 Multiplexer Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

1.6 CM-5 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-101.6.1 Function Groups and the Configuration Switches . . . . . .1-121.6.2 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

2.0 Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

2.2 Tools and Cables Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

2.3 Unpacking and Inspecting ACS-160 Equipment . . . . . . . . .2-3

2.4 Installing the Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32.4.1 Installing a Redundant Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

2.5 Wiring Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

2.6 MA-215 and MA-217B Module Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72.6.1 Input/Bias Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

2.7 Connecting T1 Circuit(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-92.7.1 Connecting a Channel Service Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-92.7.2 Using the ACS-160 with the Integrated CSU . . . . . . . . . . .2-92.7.3 Wiring the External Timing Connectors (Optional) . . . . .2-122.7.4 Wiring the Remote Port (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-132.7.5 Wiring Power and Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

2.8 Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 4: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Table of Contents4

3.0 Multiplexer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3.2 Using a Channel Service Unit (CSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3.3 CM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3.4 CM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu . . . . . . . . . .3-11

3.5 T1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-163.5.1 Primary vs. Fallback Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-173.5.2 Timing Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-173.5.3 Timing Status Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-183.5.4 When To Use Each Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-193.5.5 Synchronized T1 Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-213.5.6 Frame-Synchronized T1 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

3.6 T1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group) . . . . . .3-243.6.1 CSU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-243.6.2 Framing and Line Code Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

3.7 Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s . . . . . . . . .3-263.7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-263.7.2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-263.7.3 Installation of Redundant Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-263.7.4 Remote Control of Redundant CM-5s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-293.7.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-293.7.6 CM-5TD Time Delay Common Modules . . . . . . . . . . . .3-323.7.7 Network Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

3.8 Integrated time delay - CM-5TD (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-333.8.1 CM-5TD Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-333.8.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

3.9 T1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-353.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-353.9.2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-363.9.3 ALERT Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-363.9.4 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-373.9.5 Remote Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-383.9.6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

4.0 Channel Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

4.2 Introduction to Intraplex Channel Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24.2.1 Channel Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 5: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Table of Contents 5

4.2.2 Simplex vs. Duplex Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34.2.3 Channel Modules in Point-to-Point versus

Point-to-Multipoint Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34.2.4 Relationship Between Circuits and Time Slots . . . . . . . . .4-5

4.3 Channel Module Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64.3.1 Physical Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64.3.2 Time Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64.3.3 Channel Module Communication Direction. . . . . . . . . . . .4-84.3.4 Power Available for Channel Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8

4.4 Adding Channel Modules to Existing Systems . . . . . . . . .4-11

5.0 Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

5.2 Recommended Tools and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

5.3 ACS-160 Series Monitor & Control Features . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

5.4 Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55.4.1 Using T1 Loopbacks (LPBK Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55.4.2 The Meaning of Blinking Indicators (BLNK Group) . . . . .5-75.4.3 Reviewing Performance Data (RVU1 Group) . . . . . . . . . .5-85.4.4 Other Diagnostic Data (DIAG Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-105.4.5 Alerts & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

5.5 System Check-Out Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-135.5.1 Testing a Terminal Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145.5.2 Testing a Drop/Insert Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

5.6 Using Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System . . . . . . .5-205.6.1 T1 Test Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-205.6.2 Using T1 Test Equipment to Perform

In-Service Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-215.6.3 Using T1 Test Equipment to Perform

Out-of-Service Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-225.6.4 Using Analog or Data Test Equipment to

Perform Channel Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

5.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-265.7.1 Trouble Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-275.7.2 Troubleshooting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-275.7.3 Typical Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-285.7.4 Alerts and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 6: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Table of Contents6

6.0 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

6.2 Component Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26.2.1 The Main Equipment Shelf and the Motherboard . . . . . . .6-26.2.2 CM-5 Common Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56.2.3 CM-5 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106.2.4 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-146.2.5 Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-186.2.6 Module Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18

6.3 System Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-196.3.1 T1 Digital Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-196.3.2 Terminal Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-246.3.3 Point-to-Point Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-256.3.4 Drop/Insert Multiplexers (ACS-165 and ACS-168) . . . . .6-266.3.5 Drop/Insert Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27

7.0 Remote Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

7.2 The Remote Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27.2.1 Hardware and Protocol Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27.2.2 Configuring the Remote Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5

7.3 ISiCL Command Line Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-127.3.1 Address Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-127.3.2 Subaddress Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-137.3.3 Command Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-157.3.4 Parameter Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-167.3.5 Comment Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-177.3.6 Allowable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

7.4 General Format of ISiCL Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

7.5 Shelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access . . . . . .7-197.5.1 Using the LOCK and UNLOCK Commands . . . . . . . . . .7-197.5.2 Determining the Alert/Alarm Status of a Multiplexer . . .7-217.5.3 Determining the Configuration of a Common Module. . .7-267.5.4 Changing Common Module Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . .7-26

7.6 Channel Module Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-287.6.1 Determining the Status of a Channel Module. . . . . . . . . .7-287.6.2 Determining the Configuration of a Channel Module . . .7-297.6.3 Changing the Configuration of a Channel Module. . . . . .7-31

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 7: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Table of Contents 7

7.6.4 Examples of Channel Card Remote Configuration . . . . .7-317.6.5 CONFIG? Responses - Channel Module Alarms . . . . . . .7-35

7.7 CSU Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-397.7.1 Introduction to CSU Line Performance Statistics. . . . . . .7-397.7.2 Selecting a CSU Line Performance Statistics Standard . .7-397.7.3 Accessing and Evaluating CSU Line Performance

Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40

7.8 Configuring the CM-5TD Delay Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-487.8.1 Service Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-487.8.2 P Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-487.8.3 S Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-497.8.4 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-517.8.5 Changing the delay setting using the RS-232

remote port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-517.8.6 Changing the delay setting using the RS-422

control port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53

7.9 Network Management Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-547.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-547.9.2 Common Module Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .7-557.9.3 Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-587.9.4 CrossConnect Mapping for Network Management

Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62

7.10 IntraGuide Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-637.10.1 Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-637.10.2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-647.10.3 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-647.10.4 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-657.10.5 Serial Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-657.10.6 Sample Configurations Using IntraGuide. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65

8.0 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

8.1 T1 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

8.2 T1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

8.3 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

8.4 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

8.5 Remote Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

8.6 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

8.7 Alert and Alarm Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 8: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Table of Contents8

8.8 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

8.9 Channel Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

8.10 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58.10.1 Power Supply Modules for Three-Rack Unit (3RU)

Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-68.10.2 Power Supply Modules for One-Rack-Unit (1RU)

Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

8.11 Signaling and Ringing Generator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

8.12 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

8.13 Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 9: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 1

Introduction

What is in this section?1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

1.2 Manual Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

1.3 How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

1.4 Multiplexer Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

1.5 Multiplexer Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

1.6 CM-5 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 10: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionOverview

1-2

1.1 OverviewThe Intraplex ACS-160 Series is a family of digital time division multiplexers designed to transport multiple voice, data, high fidelity program audio, and other types of payload channels within a standard 1.544 Mbps T1 circuit. ACS-160 Series multiplexers are available in terminal, dual terminal, and drop/insert configurations, to support point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and other network topologies.

Key ACS-160 Series features include:

• proprietary robust framing algorithm optimized to maintain operation in poor transmission environments

• versatile system timing options to facilitate connection to almost any network

• reliability, small size, low power consumption, and configuration flexibility

• compliance with ANSI SF (D4) and ESF T1 frame formats

• support for both B8ZS and AMI T1 line codes

• byte-formatted time-division multiplexing for compatibility with local exchange and inter-exchange carrier digital crossconnect switches (DCS)

• optional fiber optic interface (see Section 3.9, T1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters, on page 3-35 for details)

• convenient built-in diagnostic capability

• remote access for control and status monitoring

• integrated channel service unit (CSU) compliant with ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 (MA-215)

• reporting of near and far end line performance statistics

• integrated digital time delay option

• optional redundant power supply capability for 3RU systems

• integrated redundant common module capability

• wideband data, synchronous and asynchronous data, voice, and high fidelity program audio channel modules

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 11: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionManual Scope

1-3

1.2 Manual Scope This manual is the primary reference covering the configuration, installation, operation, and troubleshooting of Intraplex ACS-160 Series T1 Multiplexers.

If you have any questions on the operation of your Intraplex system for which you cannot find the answers in this manual, please call Intraplex Customer Service at (513) 459-3400.

1.3 How to Use This ManualIf you need information on a specific topic, refer to the Index located on page I-1. For general information, use the following guidelines:

Readers Unfamiliar with the ACS-160 Series. You can use this manual as a tutorial by reading or skimming all sections in order.

Installers. If you are already familiar with the ACS-160 Series, go directly to Section 2, Installation and Wiring for step-by-step installation instructions. Otherwise, we recommend that you read at least the rest of this introductory section before beginning.

Transmission and Planning Engineers. ACS-160 Series configuration guidelines are located in Section 3, Multiplexer Setup and Section 4, Channel Module Overview. T1 input/output, power, and other specifications appear in Section 8, Specifications.

Maintenance Technicians. If you are already familiar with the ACS-160 Series then go directly to Section 5, Testing and Troubleshooting, for test procedures and troubleshooting guidelines. Otherwise, we recommend that you review Sections 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 before proceeding to Section 5.

“As shipped” configuration sheets for this multiplexer are located in the front pocket of this binder. Test procedures for the specific channel module shipped with this system can be found in the individual channel module manuals.

Diagnostic and control access is also available remotely from a PC or other type of computer, or from a dumb terminal. Section 7, Remote Control Operation provides details on using the remote access feature.

To make this manual as easy as possible to use, some information is repeated throughout the book.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 12: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionMultiplexer Configurations

1-4

1.4 Multiplexer ConfigurationsThe ACS-160 series comprises six models:

• ACS-163 3RU T1 terminal multiplexer

• ACS-165 3RU T1 drop & insert multiplexer

• ACS-166 3RU T1 dual terminal multiplexer

• ACS-167 1RU T1 terminal multiplexer

• ACS-168 1RU T1 drop/insert multiplexer

• ACS-169 1RU T1 dual multiplexer

All ACS-160 Series multiplexers are rack-mountable in EIA standard 19" racks. Full size, “3RU” shelves (ACS-163, ACS-165, and ACS-166) are 5¼" high (Figure 1-1 on page 1-5). Compact, “1RU” shelves (ACS-167, ACS-168, and ACS-169) are 1¾" high (Figure 1-2 on page 1-5).

The 1RU versions perform the same functions as their 3RU counterparts, but differ in the number of channel modules they can accommodate, the type of power supply used, the physical orientation of the modules in the shelf, and the connection points for alarm relays and a ring generator. These differences are pointed out throughout this manual in the appropriate sections.

The ACS-163 and ACS-167 terminal multiplexers each terminate one T1 circuit. The ACS-165 and ACS-168 each terminate two T1 circuits and allow channels to pass between the two circuits as well as to terminate at the multiplexer.

The ACS-166 and ACS-169 each provide two T1 terminal multiplexers in a single shelf. They share the same power supply and alarm reporting system, but are otherwise independent; there is no communication between the two T1 circuits.

Unless otherwise specified, all references to the ACS-163 also apply to the ACS-167, all references to the ACS-165 also apply to the ACS-168, and all references to the ACS-166 also apply to the ACS-169.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 13: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionMultiplexer Component Parts

1-5

Figure 1-1 ACS-163, ACS-165, and ACS-166 multiplexers, front view (closed)

Figure 1-2 ACS-167, ACS-168, and ACS-169 multiplexers, front view (closed)

1.5 Multiplexer Component PartsEach ACS-160 Series multiplexer is made up of the following components:

Main Equipment Shelf: a 19" wide rack-mount shelf, 5¼" high for a 3RU shelf, or 1¾" high for a 1RU shelf. This shelf has slots for plug-in common modules, channel modules, module adapters, and power supplies.

Caution: All common modules, channel modules, and power supplies must be inserted so that the white eject tab is at the bottom in a 3RU shelf, and at the right in a 1RU shelf.

CM-5 Common Modules: one in a terminal multiplexer, two in a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer. Each provides one T1 port. Details of this module are found in Section 1.6, CM-5 User Interface, on page 1-10. If a system is using fiber optics, the CM-5F fiber optic common module is used. For optional time delay capability, the CM-5TD module is used.

Channel Modules: one or more, for voice, data, high fidelity audio, and special applications. Each channel module may terminate one or more payload circuits. See Channel Module Overview on page 4-1.

Module Adapters: All common and channel modules require module adapters, which insert directly behind each module and provide the circuit connector(s). Every channel module works with at least one type of module adapter, and some channel modules are compatible with several module adapters, each one providing a different type of connector or circuit interface.

Each CM-5 common module is normally provided with an MA-215 module adapter. The MA-215 supports common module redundancy and CSU applications. It has an RJ-48C jack for the T1 port. If a system is equipped with a

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 14: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionMultiplexer Component Parts

1-6

fiber optic interface, the MA-215 is replaced by a fiber optic interface adapter, as described in Section 3.9, T1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters, on page 3-35.

An MA-217B module adapter is also available. The MA-217B can employ the CM-5 common module and has a DB-15 connector for the T1 port.

Power Supplies: one is always supplied, and a second may be added in 3RU shelf systems for power supply redundancy. (A redundant power supply cannot be installed in a 1RU shelf.) Standard power supplies for both 1RU and 3RU shelves are 60-watt, 155 or 230VAC. There are also 50-watt supplies for 3RU shelves, in -48VDC, +24VDC and -24VDC versions.

Intraplex also produces optional 100-watt supplies for use in 3RU shelves with high power requirements. (Power requirements are determined by the type and number of channel modules in the multiplexer, as described in Section 4.3.4, Power Available for Channel Modules, on page 4-8. Section 8, Specifications includes a listing of Intraplex power supplies.)

The physical placement of the ACS-160 components in the equipment shelf are shown in Figure 1-3 below through Figure 1-14 on page 1-10.

Figure 1-3 Front (open) view of an ACS-163

CM-5Power supply

17 physical slots available for channel modules

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 15: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionMultiplexer Component Parts

1-7

Figure 1-4 Front (open) view of an ACS-165

Figure 1-5 Front (open) view of an ACS-166

Figure 1-6 Front (open) view of an ACS-167

Powersupply

16 slots for channel modulesDI-ACM-5

DI-BCM-5

Second CM-5 First CM-5

16 slots for channel modules

Main power supply

CM-5

Five slots for channel modules

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 16: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionMultiplexer Component Parts

1-8

Figure 1-7 Front (open) view of an ACS-168

Figure 1-8 Front (open) view of an ACS-169

Figure 1-9 Rear view of an equipped ACS-163

DI-A CM-5Four slots for channel modules

DI-B CM-5

The top CM-5 controls these channel modules

The bottom CM-5 controls these channel modules

Two CM-5s (ACS-169 only)

MA-215 for CM-5

Module adapters for channel modules

Terminal strip 1(DC power and ring generator)

Terminal strip 2(alert and alarm relays)

ACpower in

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 17: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionMultiplexer Component Parts

1-9

Figure 1-10 Rear view of an ACS-165

Figure 1-11 Rear view of an ACS-166

Figure 1-12 Rear view of an ACS-167

MA-215 for each CM-5

MA-215 for first CM-5 MA-215 for second CM-5

Connector for alarm out, signal battery and ring generator input

AC power inMA-215 for CM-5

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 18: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionCM-5 User Interface

1-10

Figure 1-13 Rear view of an ACS-168

Figure 1-14 Rear view of an ACS-169

1.6 CM-5 User InterfaceThis section describes the local user interface to the ACS-160 Series multiplexers. For details on using the remote interface, see Section 7, Remote Control Operation.

The jacks, switches and indicators on the CM-5 common module form the primary user interface for the ACS-160 Series (see Figure 1-15 on page 1-11). These fall into three basic categories:

Test access: The left side of the module contains T1 input and output test jacks.

Configuration: The center section contains four items that work together to enable the user to view and change operational parameters of the CM-5. These are the GROUP and SET/NEXT switches, a four-character alphanumeric display for abbreviated group and function names, and a bi-level indicator (green on top, red on the bottom) that indicates whether the function shown on the display is currently active.

Status Monitoring: On the right side of the module are twelve indicators for T1 status, primary timing status, loopback activity, and CPU activity.

MA-215 for DI-A CM-5

MA-215 for DI-B CM-5

MA-215 for second CM-5

MA-215 for first CM-5Bottom CM-5 controls these channel modules

Top CM-5 controls these channel modules

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 19: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionCM-5 User Interface

1-11

Figure 1-15 Front view of CM-5

Note: Because CM-5 modules install vertically in 3RU shelves, "up" and "down" on the toggle switches actually refer to the user's right and left respectively in an ACS-163, ACS-165, or ACS-166 (Figure 1-16).

Figure 1-16 Using the GROUP and SET/NEXT switches in a 3RU shelf

Down Up

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 20: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionCM-5 User Interface

1-12

1.6.1 Function Groups and the Configuration SwitchesThe user-accessible CM-5 functions are organized into groups. These function groups include setup options such as SF and ESF (frame formats), current status conditions such as receiving all ones, and informational items such as the CM-5 firmware revision. The groups are accessed from two different configuration group menus.

Basic configuration. This group menu provides the settings used in most configuration setups. A detailed explanation of the menu settings is provided in Section 3.3, CM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu, on page 3-2.

Advanced configuration. This group menu is used for controlling CM-5TD functions and other specialized applications that rarely need adjustment in most systems. A detailed explanation of the menu settings is provided in Section 3.4, CM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu, on page 3-11.

1.6.1.1 Displaying CM-5 FunctionsWhen the CM-5 display is blank or when a function is displayed, press down on the GROUP toggle switch to view the name of the currently selected group. Once the current group name is displayed, press down on the GROUP switch again to select the next group or press up to select the previous group, until the desired group is displayed.

Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display the first function in the currently selected group. Once a function appears, press down on the SET/NEXT switch repeatedly until the desired function is displayed.

The bi-level indicator to the right of the function display indicates the status of the currently displayed function. If the top (green) part of the bi-level indicator is lit, then this function is active. If the bottom (red) part of the bi-level indicator is on, the function is not active.

1.6.1.2 Setting CM-5 FunctionsTo turn on a function that is not currently active, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch while that function is on the display. Pressing up once causes the top (green) section of the bi-level indicator to blink, indicating that a setup change will take place if the SET/NEXT switch is pressed up again. Actually pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch a second time causes the green indicator to turn on continuously, indicating that the selected setup parameter has been changed to the currently displayed setting. If a function is already active, then pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch again causes no status or setup changes.

For example, if the display shows ESF while frame format is set to SF, then the red indicator will be on. Pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch once will cause the top (green) indicator to blink. Pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch a second time will actually change the current T1 framing format from SF to ESF - the red indicator goes out, and the green indicator stays on steadily.

It is important to note that some setup functions are mutually exclusive; activating one function will automatically deactivate another. Examples include line code

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 21: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionCM-5 User Interface

1-13

(you can set line code to AMI or B8ZS but not both) and frame format (you can set frame format to SF or ESF but not both). Other functions are not mutually exclusive. For example, CM-5 Line (LnLB) and Equipment (EqLB) loopbacks in the LPBK group may be activated at the same time.

1.6.2 IndicatorsIn addition to the indicators on the CM-5, four system status indicators are located on the power supply, and are visible when the front cover of the shelf is closed (shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 on page 1-5).

Table 1-1 summarizes the meaning of the indicators on both the CM-5 and the power supply. For more detailed descriptions of their functions, see Section 6.2.3.4, Indicators on the CM-5 Module, on page 6-12, and Section 6.2.4.1.2, Supply Fail Indicators, on page 6-15.

Table 1-1 Summary of status indicators

Indicator (location) Label Color When lit, indicates:

T1 Status (CM-5) TX OUT Green Transmit output is detected

RX IN Green Receive input is detected. Blinks steadily when the receive input signal is all ones, a yellow alarm, or has excess jitter. This indicator may blink erratically if there is noise on the line.

ERR Yellow Errors detected

BPV Yellow Bipolar violations are detected

FRM Red T1 signal is out of frame or no signal is being received

YEL Yellow Yellow alarm

AIS Yellow Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

Timing (CM-5) LOOP Green Loop timing is active (through timing on a drop/insert multiplexer)

INT Green Internal timing is active

EXT Green External timing is active

System LPBK Yellow Any internal loopback is active

Status (CM-5) CPU Red The CM-5 central processing unit has failed

System Status (CM-5) LPBK Yellow Any internal loopback is active

CPU Red The CM-5 central processing unit has failed

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 22: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IntroductionCM-5 User Interface

1-14

System Status (power supply) POWER Green The multiplexer is powered

NORMAL Green No alert or alarm is present

ALERT Yellow An alert condition exists

ALARM Red An alarm condition exists. Alert and alarm conditions are defined in Section 5.7, Troubleshooting, on page 5-26

Table 1-1 Summary of status indicators (continued)

Indicator (location) Label Color When lit, indicates:

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 23: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 2

Installation and Wiring

What is in this section?2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

2.2 Tools and Cables Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

2.3 Unpacking and Inspecting ACS-160 Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

2.4 Installing the Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

2.5 Wiring Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

2.6 MA-215 and MA-217B Module Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

2.7 Connecting T1 Circuit(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

2.8 Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 24: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringOverview

2-2

2.1 OverviewThis section describes the general ACS-160 Series installation procedure, which consists of four parts:

1. Unpacking and inspecting the ACS-160 equipment

2. Installing the multiplexer shelves

3. Wiring the power and signal connectors

4. Applying power

2.2 Tools and Cables RequiredIn addition to the Intraplex equipment provided, the following items are necessary to complete this installation:

• basic telecommunications installation tool kit (screwdrivers, wire stripper, etc.)

• rack mounting hardware (four bolts per shelf)

• one four-wire shielded cable with RJ-48C connectors (one male end, one female end) for each T1 port

• normally, T1 connecting cables may run up to 150 feet in length. If your installation requires a longer cable, please contact Intraplex Customer Service for a recommendation

• cables for each payload channel—RS-232, RS-449, and/or V.35 for data channels between the multiplexer and DTE equipment, 22 - 24 gauge wire for program audio channels, and RJ-11 or 50-pin telco for voice

Note: All payload channels connect to the multiplexer via module adapters that plug in at the rear of the shelf. The individual channel module manuals provide detailed descriptions of the module adapter(s) and cable requirements for the modules shipped with this system.

• if the shelf is DC powered, 16 - 18 gauge wire for power connection (an AC power cable is included if the shelf is AC powered)

• optional: one unshielded cable for each remote port, if you wish to use the remote access and control feature (see Section 2.7.4 on page 2-13). For an MA-215, the multiplexer end of the cable will need an RJ-11 connector

• optional: timing cable, if external timing input or output is required. For an MA-215, the multiplexer end of each cable must have an RJ-11 connector (see Section 2.7.3 on page 2-12)

• optional: volt-ohm meter (VOM)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 25: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringUnpacking and Inspecting ACS-160 Equipment

2-3

2.3 Unpacking and Inspecting ACS-160 EquipmentUpon receiving the equipment:

1. Inspect all shipping cartons for damage. If damage is observed, notify the shipper as soon as possible.

2. Unpack all equipment.

3. Inspect equipment for damage.

4. Verify that the multiplexers are equipped as expected.

If you have any questions regarding possible equipment damage or shipping errors, please contact Intraplex Customer Service at (978) 486-9000.

Caution: Follow all of your company's rules regarding AC or DC powered equipment installation. If there is a conflict between any procedure in this manual and your company's safety rules, then your company's safety rules must take priority.

2.4 Installing the Multiplexer ACS-160 Series multiplexers are normally shipped pre-configured, with common and channel modules already installed. All modules and module adapters can remain in place while bolting each shelf into its equipment rack.

1. Make sure all modules and module adapters are seated properly.

2. Bolt the shelf into its equipment rack.

Note: If the shelf is AC-powered, make sure that the power cable will be accessible for maintenance purposes.

2.4.1 Installing a Redundant Power Supply Each 3RU Intraplex shelf can contain a second power supply for redundancy. If the main supply fails, the system will continue operating using the redundant supply. Simply insert the second power supply into the redundant supply slot on the front (its indicators will light up identically to those on the main supply). Due to space limitations, 1RU shelves do not have the capacity for redundant power supplies.

Power supply modules require no special setup. As long as they are plugged into their slots and system power is applied, they are operating.

If a 3RU shelf is equipped with two power supplies (main and redundant) and one of the supplies fails, it may be removed and a new supply inserted without powering down the system.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 26: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringWiring Procedures

2-4

2.5 Wiring ProceduresThe following procedures assume that the multiplexers are completely wired before placing into service any T1 or payload circuit. Figure 2-1 on page 2-5 and Figure 2-2 on page 2-6 identify the rear panel connectors for the 3RU and 1RU equipment shelves, respectively.

On some multiplexers, the CM-5 may be equipped with an MA-217B module adapter instead of an MA-215. Both the MA-215 and MA-217B provide T1, remote port, and timing connectors. However, the MA-215 has an RJ-48C connector for the T1 circuit, and the MA-217B has a DB-15 connector for the T1 circuit.

Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 on page 2-6 illustrate these differences and define the pin locations on both module adapter connectors.

Note: Additional information on the MA-215 and MA-217B is found in Section 2.6 on page 2-7. Unless otherwise indicated, all references to the MA-215 will also apply to the MA-217B.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 27: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringWiring Procedures

2-5

Figure 2-1 Rear panel connectors on an ACS-165 using MA-215 module adapters

Terminal strip 2(alert and alarm relays)

MA-215 forDI-B CM-5

MA-215 for DI-A CM-5

Blank plate coveringaccess to the expansion connectors

AC power in (replaced by a blank plate if the shelf is DC powered)

Terminal strip 1 (DC power and ring generator)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 28: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringWiring Procedures

2-6

Figure 2-2 Rear panel connectors on an ACS-168 using MA-217B module adapters

Figure 2-3 Connectors and pin locations on the MA-215 and MA-217B

Connector for alarm signal battery and ring generator

MA-217B for DI-B CM-5

MA-217B for DI-A CM-5

AC power input

Available slots for module adapters

DB-15

Clock timing input

Clock timing output

Remote control port

E1 signal connectors

RJ-11

RJ-48C

RJ-11

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 29: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringMA-215 and MA-217B Module Adapters

2-7

2.6 MA-215 and MA-217B Module AdaptersA CM-5 equipped with an MA-215 or MA-217B module adapter provides for connectivity with a channel service unit (CSU). Figure 2-4 shows the top and faceplate of the MA-215 and the faceplate of the MA-217B (the top of the MA-217B looks nearly identical to the MA-215 with the exception of the DB-15 jack. Table 2-1 describes the MA-215 and MA-217B components and where to find information for each.

Figure 2-4 MA-215 and MA-217B module adapter views

Table 2-1 MA-215 and MA-217B module adapter components

Component Description

SW1 Input/Bias switches: see Table 2-2 on page 2-8 for settings

SW2 Operating mode: see Figure 2-4 for switch settings

JP1 Not used

JP2 Common module redundancy: see Section 3.7, Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s, on page 3-26

J1 T1 network port: see Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 on page 2-11 for pin assignments

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 30: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringMA-215 and MA-217B Module Adapters

2-8

2.6.1 Input/Bias SwitchesSW1 on the MA-215/MA-217B configures the following functions:

• RS-485 remote port bias

• RS-485 remote port termination

• external timing input impedance

• optional delay input impedance

These functions are controlled by the positions of the SW1 DIP switches (see Figure 2-4 on page 2-7). Table 2-2 lists the switches and their functions.

J2 Remote port: see Table 2-8 on page 2-14 for pin assignments

J3 External timing in port: see Table 2-6 on page 2-13 for pin assignments

J4 External timing out port: see Table 2-7 on page 2-13 for pin assignments

Table 2-1 MA-215 and MA-217B module adapter components (continued)

Component Description

Table 2-2 MA-215/MA-217B SW1 functions

SwitchFactory Default Description

1 and 2 On These two switches control the bias of the RS-485 portion of the remote port (used for daisy chaining remote ports). These switches normally should be in the on (bias) position. When daisy chaining, one module adapter in the chain should have these switches on, and the others should be off

3 On This switch controls the termination impedance (120 ohms) for the RS-485 portion of the remote port. This switch should normally be in the on position. When daisy chaining, the last multiplexer in the chain should have this switch on, and the others should be off

4 On This switch controls the external timing input impedance (120 ohms; TIMING IN port). This switch is normally set to on. When daisy chaining, the last multiplexer in the chain should have this switch on, and the others should be off

5 On This switch controls the input impedance (120 ohms) when using the optional time delay capability. It is normally set to on

6 On Not used

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 31: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-9

2.7 Connecting T1 Circuit(s)

2.7.1 Connecting a Channel Service UnitIf your multiplexer will be connected to a T1 line leased from a telephone company, a channel service unit (CSU) is required at each end of the circuit. The T1 output of the multiplexer connects to the CSU, which converts it into the appropriate format for transmission to the telephone company central office.

The ACS-160 with the CM-5 common module and the MA-215 module adapter has an ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016-compliant CSU built-in. This feature eliminates the need for an external CSU and allows you to connect a T1 directly to your ACS-160. See the appropriate section below for your CSU configuration.

2.7.2 Using the ACS-160 with the Integrated CSUConnect your T1 line to the MA-215 on the ACS-160 using an RJ-48C connector. The MA-215 is properly configured at the factory and no change is necessary for connection to a T1 line. Figure 2-5 shows the pin 1 and 8 orientation for the MA-215 and the RJ-48C connector.

Figure 2-5 MA-215 T1 port and RJ-48C connector pin orientation

2.7.2.1 Configuring the Integrated CSUThe integrated CSU is pre-configured at the factory and normally does not need additional options set. See Section 3.3.0.3, Displaying and Changing Items in the Basic Configuration Group, on page 3-3 for information on setting different options.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 32: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-10

2.7.2.2 Line Build Out When using the ACS-160’s integrated CSU, you must configure the line build out (LBO) according to the specifications from your T1 service provider. Configure the CM-5 using the Configuration Group as described below. The factory default is DSX.

1. On the CM-5, press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display reads TLBO. Notice that TLBO is underscored. This indicates an additional subgroup.

3. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch to display DSX, which is the first of eight TLBO options (DSX, 200', 333', 467', 595', 7dB, 15dB, and exit). The actual settings, shown in table ,differ from the settings that are displayed.

Table 2-3 Actual CSU line build-out settings

4. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display reads the line build out specified by your T1 provider.

5. Press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, signifying that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that your selection for the line build out is active.

2.7.2.3 Wiring the ACS-160 with Integrated CSU to the T1On a drop and insert multiplexer, wire the T1 circuits intended for DI-A and DI-B to the MA-215 behind the CM-5 modules designated as DI-A (physical slot 1) and DI-B (physical slot 2) respectively.

On an ACS-166, the CM-5 modules for the two independent terminals are located in physical slots 1 and 10. On an ACS-169, the CM-5 modules are located in physical slots 3 and 4.

The T1 circuit can be wired to the T1 I/O connector (DB-15) on the MA-217B or the T1 I/O connector (RJ-48C) in the MA-215.

Table 2-5 on page 2-11 lists the pin assignments for the T1 I/O (DB-15) connector for the MA-217B.

Table 2-4 on page 2-11 lists the pin assignments for the T1 I/O (RJ-48C) connector for the MA-215.

Display Actual Setting

DSX 0dB (0 to 133 ft)

7db -7.5dB

15db -15dB

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 33: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-11

Figure 2-6 on page 2-11 illustrates the normal connections between the T1 I/O connector on an MA-215 and the T1 I/O connector on a channel service unit (CSU).

Figure 2-6 Connecting the T1 circuit between an MA-215 and a CSU

Table 2-4 Pin assignments of the T1 I/O connector on the MA-215

Connector (RJ-48C) Pin Description

1 Receive from network, tip

2 Receive from network, ring

3 Not used

4 Send towards network, ring

5 Send towards network, tip

6 Not used

7 Frame ground (transmit)

8 Frame ground (receive)

Table 2-5 Pin assignments of the T1 I/O connector on the MA-217B

Connector (DB-15) Pins Label Description

1 (Tip) and 9 (Ring)

T1 (Tip)R1 (Ring)

T1 Out. The balanced T1 output of the corresponding CM-5

3 (Tip) and 11 (Ring)

T1 (Tip)R1 (Ring)

T1 In. The balanced T1 input of the corresponding CM-5

2, 4, 8 & 10 T1 signal grounds. These pins may be used to provide signal ground to an external DCE such as a T1 CSU

All other pins Not used

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 34: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-12

Figure 2-7 illustrates the normal connections between the T1 I/O connector on an MA-216 and the T1 I/O connector on a channel service unit (CSU).

Figure 2-7 Connecting the T1 circuit between an MA-217B and a CSU

Caution: The multiplexer and the CSU must both be set to use the same T1 frame format (ESF or SF) and line coding (B8ZS or AMI).

2.7.3 Wiring the External Timing Connectors (Optional)The MA-215 and MA-217B modules both provide RJ-11 ports for timing input and output.

Timing Out is a balanced 1.544 MHz RS-422/RS-485 output from the corresponding CM-5 that may be used as an external T1 timing source by other equipment.

Timing In is a balanced 1.544 MHz RS-422/RS-485 input to the corresponding CM-5 that may be connected to an external T1 timing source. The CM-5 will synchronize to this source only if the module timing is set to EXT.

These jacks may also be used to “daisy-chain” several multiplexers together and synchronize them all to the same clock. This application is illustrated in Section 3-9, Multiple systems synchronized to a common timing source, on page 3-22.

The external timing input connection for the MA-215 and MA-217B is outlined in Table 2-6 on page 2-13.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 35: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-13

The external timing output connections for the MA-215 and MA-217B is outlined in Table 2-7.

2.7.4 Wiring the Remote Port (Optional)To take advantage of the optional remote monitoring and control feature of ACS-160 Series multiplexers, connect a PC or ASCII terminal to the remote port on the MA-215 or MA-217B. Connection to the remote port can be made either by direct wiring, or via a dial-up circuit using a modem. These options are described in Section 7, Remote Control Operation. Intraplex can provide a cable and adapter (RJ-11 to DB-9) for PC to common module port connections.

Both the MA-215 and MA-217B modules use an RJ-11 jack for the remote port. The pin assignments are illustrated in Table 2-8 below.

When connecting the remote port to a modem, use a null modem cable (a null modem cable provides a standard RS-232 DCE to DCE connection).

On a dual terminal or drop and insert multiplexer, each CM-5 is controlled from the remote port on its corresponding module adapter, so each must be connected

Table 2-6 Pin assignments for the MA-215/MA-217B external timing in port

Connector Pin Description

1 External primary timing in positive (+)

2 External primary timing in negative (-)

3 External timing source select

4 Signal ground

5 External secondary timing in positive (+)or CM-5TD time delay control in positive (+)

6 External secondary timing in negative (-)or CM-5TD time delay control in negative (-)

Table 2-7 Pin assignments for the MA-215/MA-217B timing out port

Connector Pin Description

1 External timing out positive (+)

2 External timing out negative (-)

3 Signal ground

4 Signal ground

5 Auxiliary positive (+) not defined

6 Auxiliary negative (-) not defined

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 36: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-14

separately. For a dial-up connection, a code-operated switch may be used to control both CM-5 modules via a single dial-up line.

Table 2-8 Pin assignments for the MA-215/MA-217B remote port

Connector Pin Description

1 RS-485 negative (-)

2 RS-232 transmit

3 Not used

4 RS-232 receive

5 Signal ground

6 RS-485 positive (+)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 37: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-15

2.7.5 Wiring Power and Alarm Connections Table 2-9 on page 2-16 defines the power and alarm terminals on a 3RU shelf, and lists the equivalent connection points on a 1RU shelf (these equivalents are pins of the DB-15 alarms connector). Figure 2-8, Figure 2-9, and Figure 2-10 on page 2-18 illustrate the typical power connections to a 3RU shelf. Figure 2-11 on page 2-18 illustrates the typical connections to a 1RU shelf.

Use the following procedure to make connections for power and alarms. Each instruction in this procedure gives the connection for a 3RU shelf, followed by the equivalent connection for a 1RU shelf (in parentheses) if it is different.

1. Connect the GND screw (pin 13 of the Alarms connector on a 1RU shelf) to station ground.

2. If the shelf is AC-powered, verify that the AC cord is available. Do not plug the cord into the AC source yet.

3. If the shelf is DC-powered:

3a. Verify that a 2A slow-blow external fuse is available in the DC-power line to protect the multiplexer. Remove this fuse and do not replace it until you are ready to power up the shelf.

Caution: This fuse must be provided, both to protect the multiplexer and to provide a safe means of removing power from a DC-powered shelf.

3b. Connect the -BAT terminal (the black pigtail lead on a 1RU shelf) to the negative terminal of the station battery.

3c. Connect the +BAT terminal (both the green and white pigtail leads on a 1RU shelf) to the positive terminal of the station battery, tied to ground.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 38: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-16

4. Connect RING GEN (pin 14 on a 1RU shelf) to the external ringing generator or loop current source (optional - this step is necessary only if the shelf contains one or more foreign exchange station end modules, used for automatic ring down or off premises extension).

Caution: When using an external ring generator, place a 0.5A slow-blow fuse in line. For safety reasons, this fuse must be installed unless the back of the multiplexer will be enclosed.

5. Connect SIG BAT (pin 15 on a 1RU shelf) to signaling battery. This step is required only if the shelf contains one or more foreign exchange station end modules, 4-wire E&M voice modules using Type II signaling, or in some cases, foreign exchange office end modules. Check with Intraplex customer service if you are not sure whether this battery is necessary. If the shelf is DC-powered, then a separate signaling battery is not required; connect SIG BAT to -BAT R instead.

Caution: When using a separate signaling battery, place an in-line, slow-blow fuse. The fuse should be 1A for up to 12 voice circuits, or 2A for 13 to 24 circuits. For safety reasons, this fuse must be installed unless the back of the multiplexer is enclosed.

6. If ALARM and ALERT contacts are to be used, connect the desired contacts to terminal strip 2 (pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, and 11 on a 1RU shelf).

Table 2-9 Power and alarm connectors

3RU ShelfTerminal

1RU Shelf Pinsa Description

GND screw Pin 13 Chassis ground

RING GEN Pin 14 Ring generator input for an external ring generator referenced to -48VDC signaling battery input. Connect one side of the ring generator to this point, and the other side to the SIG BAT inputCAUTION: The ring generator must be externally fused or its current limited

SIG BAT Pin 15 -48VDC signaling battery input for connection to an external signaling voltage source when this is needed by one or more channel modules. This input may also be connected to an external loop current generatorCAUTION: This voltage source must be externally fused or its current limited

+BAT R None Not used on the ACS-160 series

-BAT R None Jumper this terminal to SIG BAT in a DC-powered shelf requiring a talk battery

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 39: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-17

Figure 2-8 Connection for DC operation of 3RU systems

+BAT White lead Battery common (+DC power input)

-BAT Black lead Battery (-DC power input)

ALARM NO Pin 1 Alarm relay: normally open contactb

ALARM NC Pin 2 Alarm relay: normally closed contactb

ALERT NO Pin 3 Alert relay: normally open contactb

ALERT NC Pin 4 Alert relay: normally closed contactb

ALARM COM Pin 9 Alarm relay: common

ALERT COM Pin 11 Alert relay: common

a. The 1RU shelf equivalents are pins on the DB-15 ALARMS connector.b. When the shelf is not powered, all relays default to their alarm positions. Normally open

contacts will be closed and normally closed contacts will be open.

Table 2-9 Power and alarm connectors (continued)

3RU ShelfTerminal

1RU Shelf Pinsa Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 40: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringConnecting T1 Circuit(s)

2-18

Figure 2-9 Connection for DC operation of a 3RU system with a ring generator

Figure 2-10 Connection for AC operation of 3RU system with an external talk battery

Figure 2-11 Connection for AC operation of 1RU system with an external talk battery

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 41: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringApplying Power

2-19

2.8 Applying Power After all equipment has been installed and wired, apply power to each shelf as follows:

1. Verify that all modules (common, channel, and power) are seated snugly.

2. If the shelf is AC-powered, plug in the AC line cord.If the shelf is DC-powered, insert the external power fuse.

3. Verify that the POWER indicator is on, and the POWER FAIL indicator is off. In a 3RU shelf, both the MAIN POWER FAIL and REDUNDANT POWER FAIL indicators should be off. Ignore all other indicators on the shelf for the time being.

If no indicators are illuminated on any power supply then both power modules have failed, the fuses on both power supply circuit boards have blown, or (most likely) power has not been wired to the shelf. Test for the correct voltages as described below.

If the POWER indicators turn on, but the POWER FAIL indicator for one power supply is on as well, then that power module is not functioning or has a blown fuse on its printed circuit board.

4. Observe that each CM-5 module displays its current mode setting for several seconds after power is first applied. In a terminal multiplexer (ACS-163, ACS-166, or ACS-167), the display should read TERM; in a drop and insert multiplexer (ACS-165 or ACS-168), the module in slot 1 should display DI-A and the module in slot 2 should display DI-B. Redundant CM-5 modules will always display BKUP during power up (see Section 3.7, Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s, on page 3-26 for further details on redundant common modules). The multiplexer mode can also be set to spare (SPAR).

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 42: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Installation and WiringApplying Power

2-20

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 43: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 3

Multiplexer Setup

What is in this section?3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3.2 Using a Channel Service Unit (CSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3.3 CM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

3.4 CM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

3.5 T1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

3.6 T1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

3.7 Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

3.8 Integrated time delay - CM-5TD (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

3.9 T1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 44: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupOverview

3-2

3.1 OverviewThis section describes the setup options for the ACS-160 Series multiplexers and explains how to make changes to them.

1. For information on installing and configuring channel modules, see Section 4, Channel Module Overview.

2. For information on using the remote access and control feature, see Section 7, Remote Control Operation.

3. For information on diagnostic functions, including the use of T1 loopbacks, see Section 5, Testing and Troubleshooting.

3.2 Using a Channel Service Unit (CSU)If the equipment will be connected to a T1 line leased from a telephone company, a channel service unit (CSU) is required at each end of the circuit. An MA-215 module adapter has a CSU provided, however other module adapters will require an external CSU. The T1 output of the multiplexer connects to the CSU, which converts it into the appropriate format for transmission to the telephone company central office. The CSU may also perform additional features such as error logging. Consult your CSU manual for setup instructions and information on the features it provides.

The T1 line code and frame format settings selected for the multiplexer must match those on the CSU. Section 3.6, T1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group), on page 3-24 describes how to set these functions.

3.3 CM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu3.3.0.1 Introduction

The basic configuration of the CM-5 can be determined and changed by the user interface shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-3. The basic configuration provides most of the settings you will need to make to the CM-5. Figure 3-2 on page 3-5 details the flow of the basic configuration group menu and Table 3-2 on page 3-6 supplements that information with a complete description of each group.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 45: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-3

On power-up, the 4-character display on the front panel will indicate the multiplexing mode on the primary CM-5 as shown in Table 3-1. If a backup CM-5 is installed, it will always read BKUP during power-up.

Note: The following sections contain procedures that include use of the GROUP and SET/NEXT switches. If you are not already familiar with using these switches, please review Section 1.6, CM-5 User Interface, on page 1-10 before proceeding

3.3.0.2 Entering the Configuration GroupThe following procedures are used to enter the configuration group (Figure 3-1 illustrates the switch and indicator locations):

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TIME.

2. Release the switch. You are now in the Configuration Group.

Figure 3-1 Horizontal view of the CM-5 user interface

3.3.0.3 Displaying and Changing Items in the Basic Configuration Group1. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the

menu you want to change.

Notice that some items are underscored which indicates an additional subgroup. Complete the following steps to enter and cycle through any subgroups.

1a. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch to display the first of the subgroup options.

1b. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through other subgroup options.

Table 3-1 Power-up display on the primary CM-5

Front-panel display Indicated mode

TERM Terminal multiplexer

DI-A DI-A in a drop/insert multiplexer

DI-B DI-B in a drop/insert multiplexer

SPAR Spare

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 46: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-4

2. Press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the option you wanted to change is now enabled.

The functions found in the basic menu are detailed in other areas of this manual as follows:

T1 operational functions: The timing (TIME) and signal format/line code (TSEL) groups are described in Section 3.5, T1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group), on page 3-16 and Section 3.6, T1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group), on page 3-24 respectively. Redundant CM-5 settings (REDN) are described in Section 3.7, Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s, on page 3-26.

Diagnostic functions: The loopback (LPBK) and informational (BLNK, RVU1, and DIAG) groups are described in Testing and Troubleshooting on page 5-1.

Remote access setup functions: The shelf address (ADDR) and remote port (SIO) groups are described in Section 7.2.2.1, Setting the Network Address (ADDR Group), on page 7-5 and Section 7.2.2.2, Setting Remote Port Parameters (SIO Group), on page 7-8 respectively. Network management control settings (COMM) are described in Section 7.9, Network Management Communications, on page 7-55.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 47: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-5

Figure 3-2 CM-5 basic configuration group menu structure

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 48: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-6

Table 3-2 CM-5 basic configuration group

Group Selections Description

TSEL TLBO Sets the line build-out range for the T1 port on the CM-5. The display shows the midpoint of the range. See Section 3.6, T1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group), on page 3-24RED = not selected, GREEN = selected

DSX (default) Set build-out for DSX standard (0' to 133')

200' Set build-out for 133' to 266'

333' Set build-out for 266' to 399'

467' Set build-out for 399' to 533'

595' Set build-out for 533' to 655'

7dB Network build-out for -7.5 dB

15dB Network build-out for -15 dB

exit Exits TLBO and displays sub-menu

CSU Sets the standard for the CM-5’s integrated CSU. See Section 3.6.1, CSU Configuration, on page 3-24RED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Off Disables the integrated CSU for operation with an external CSU

ATT Sets the standard for the CM-5’s integrated CSU to AT&T TR54016 compliant

ANSI (default)

Sets the standard for the CM-5’s integrated CSU to ANSI T1.403 compliant

exit Exits CSU and displays sub-menu

SF Sets the framing format to SuperframeRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

ESF (default) Sets the framing format to Extended SuperframeRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

AMI Sets the line coding to alternate mark inversionRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

B8ZS (default) Sets the line coding to B8ZSRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

PDE Pulse density enforcement; for AMI mode to force a one after 15 consecutive zeros. See Section 3.6.2, Framing and Line Code Configuration, on page 3-24RED = not selected, GREEN = selected

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 49: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-7

TIME Source of multiplexer’s timing. See Section 3.5, T1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group), on page 3-16RED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Loop Loop timing of T1 link. Will only display if the CM-5 is in TERM mode

Int (default) Internal timing of T1 link. Will only display if the CM-5 is in TERM mode

Ext External timing of T1 link. Will only display if the CM-5 is in TERM mode

Thru Through timing of the T1 link. Will only display if the CM-5 is in DI-A or DI-B mode

LPBK Loopback modes. See Section 5.4.1, Using T1 Loopbacks (LPBK Group), on page 5-5 for additional details

LnLB Indicates line loopback modeRED = not in line loopback mode GREEN = in line loopback mode

PaLB Indicates payload loopback mode RED = not in payload loopback mode GREEN = in payload loopback mode

EqLB Indicates equipment loopback mode; RED = not in equipment loopback mode, GREEN = in equipment loopback mode

BLNK Rx11 Receiving all ones. See Section 5.4.2, The Meaning of Blinking Indicators (BLNK Group), on page 5-7 for details

Tx11 Transmitting all ones (also known as “keep alive circuit” or AIS)

TxYl Transmitting yellow alarm

RxYl Receiving yellow alarm

FTIM Fall back timing

NLLB Network requested line loopback

NPLB Network requested payload loopback

XsJt Excess jitter on T1 has been detected

Table 3-2 CM-5 basic configuration group (continued)

Group Selections Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 50: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-8

RVU1 TxLk Transmit phase loop lock status. See Section 5.4.3, Reviewing Performance Data (RVU1 Group), on page 5-8RED = unlocked, GREEN = locked

RxLk Receive phase loop lock statusRED = unlocked, GREEN = locked

TxRx Transmit/receive clock lockRED = unlocked, GREEN = locked

XsJt Jitter buffer statusRED = OK GREEN = Buffer exceeded

DIAG T1 or CSU CSU displays when the CM-5 is connected to the MA-215, or T1 displays when the CM-5 is connected to the MA-216. See Section 5.4.4, Other Diagnostic Data (DIAG Group), on page 5-10 for more information

X.XX Current version of the loaded firmware

Fcty Status of settingsRED = Not factory setting, GREEN = Factory settings

ADDR 0000 Multiplexer address number 0000 to 9999. See Section 7.2.2.1, Setting the Network Address (ADDR Group), on page 7-5

TDLY Time delay control for units with optional delay capability (CM-5TD) See Section 3.8, Integrated time delay - CM-5TD (optional), on page 3-33

TDSA Time delay subaddress (1-36)

LCL Local control;RED = local control off, GREEN = local control on

Table 3-2 CM-5 basic configuration group (continued)

Group Selections Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 51: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-9

COMM Network communications parameters. See Remote Control Operation on page 7-1 for more information on remote communications. For more information on network communication functions, see Section 7.9, Network Management Communications, on page 7-55

CNFG OFF (Default) Turn network communications off

MSTR Set the multiplexer to master mode

SLV Set the multiplexer to slave mode

BRDG Set the multiplexer to bridge mode

RATE 8 KB Set the data rate to 8 Kbps (1 bit/DS0)

16 KB (default)

Set the data rate to 16 Kbps (2 bit/DS0)

32 KB Set the data rate to 32 Kbps (4 bit/DS0)

64 KB Set the data rate to 64 Kbps (8 bit/DS0)

TSLT 1 to 24 Time slot for T1 DS0 (time slot 24 is the default)

SIO Serial input and output settings. Section 7.2.2.2, Setting Remote Port Parameters (SIO Group), on page 7-8 provides additional informationRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

BAUD 110 Sets baud rate to 110 bps

300 Sets baud rate to 300 bps

1200 Sets baud rate to 1200 bps

2400 Sets baud rate to 2400 bps

4800 Sets baud rate to 4800 bps

9600 Sets baud rate to 9600 bps

19.2 Sets baud rate to 19.2 kbps

57.6 Sets baud rate to 57.6 kbps

exit Exit BAUD and display PAR

PAR Spac Sets parity to space

Mark Sets parity to mark

Even Sets parity to even

Odd Sets parity to odd

exit Exit PAR and display Lock

Lock Locks and unlocks the serial port

Table 3-2 CM-5 basic configuration group (continued)

Group Selections Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 52: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu

3-10

REDN Common module redundancy settings. Only seen on redundant CM-5 common modules. See Section 3.7, Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s, on page 3-26 for additional information.

CNFG OFF Never switch to a backup

RVRT(Default)

Revertive switching. Will switch to the backup on detection of a failure in the primary, then will switch back to primary when failure condition is cleared

NVRT Non-revertive switching. Will switch to a backup when a failure is detected in the primary but will not switch back

exit Exit the CNFG sub-menu

SWCH (Manual Switching)

Switching sub-menu. Displays the status of the backup or primary switch. If the SET/NEXT indicator is green (top), then the backup common module is active. If the indicator is red (bottom), then the primary common module is active.This switch can also be used to manually toggle from the backup to primary module or from the primary to backup module.

LOF ON Loss of frame. Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving a loss of frame condition

OFF Deactivates the LOF switching

LOS ON Loss of signal. Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving a loss of signal condition

OFF Deactivates the LOS switching

YEL ON Yellow alarm. Switch to the backup if the primary receives a yellow alarm or remote alarm

OFF Deactivates the YEL or RA switching

AIS ON Alarm indication signal. Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving an AIS signal

OFF Deactivates the AIS switching

Table 3-2 CM-5 basic configuration group (continued)

Group Selections Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 53: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu

3-11

3.4 CM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu3.4.0.1 Introduction

In addition to the basic configuration features, the CM-5 also contains an Advanced Configuration Group for controlling specialized functions that rarely need adjustment in most systems.

3.4.0.2 Entering the Advanced Configuration Group1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch. As the display changes to read

DIAG, hold the switch down - do not release it.

2. While holding the GROUP switch down (the display must still read DIAG), press up once on the SET/NEXT switch. The display changes to read FTIM.

3. Release both switches. You are now in the advanced configuration group.

Note: Although you can cycle through the CM-5 groups by pressing repeatedly either up or down on the GROUP switch, you can only enter the advanced configuration group by pressing down on the switch to reach DIAG; that is, as the display cycles from RVU1 to DIAG. Pressing on the GROUP switch will exit from the advanced configuration group.

3.4.0.3 Displaying and Changing Items in the Advanced Configuration Group1. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the

menu you want to change.

2. Press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the option you wanted to change is now enabled.

Notice that some items are underscored which indicates an additional subgroup. Complete the following steps to enter and cycle through any subgroups.

1. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch to display the first of the subgroup options.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through other subgroup options.

To exit from a subgroup:

1. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display reads EXIT.

2. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch to move to the next group.

Figure 3-3 on page 3-12 details the flow of the advanced configuration group menu and Table 3-3 on page 3-13 supplements that information with a complete description of each group.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 54: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu

3-12

Figure 3-3 CM-5 advanced configuration group menu structure

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 55: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu

3-13

Table 3-3 CM-5 advanced configuration group menu

Function Group Description

FTIM Fallback timing mode. This function sets the timing source used in the event that primary timing is lostRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

FLoo Fallback timing set to loop (timing recovered from received T1)

FInt (Default) Fallback timing set to internal (multiplexer’s oscillator)

FExt Fallback timing set to external (clock input connector)

FSec Fallback timing set to secondary external

exit Exit FTIM and display RTIM

RTIM Return timing mode. When the primary timing mode is set to external, this function determines whether the timing source automatically reverts back to primaryRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Off Timing remains in fallback mode after primary timing is restored

Auto (Default) Timing returns to primary mode after primary timing is restored

exit Exit RTIM and display RXGN

RXGN Receive signal gain (input sensitivity). This function adjusts the sensitivity of the T1 receiver. Used for increasing gain with long cablesRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

30dB (Default) Receiver can accept a signal up to 30 dB below nominal

36dB Receiver can accept a signal up to 36 dB below nominal

exit Exit RXGN and display JBUF

JBUF Jitter buffer depth. This function adjusts the multiplexer’s jitter tolerance. Selecting a higher value increases the jitter buffer depth, but also increases circuit delayRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Joff No jitter buffer, minimum delay. May not work in DI-A or DI-B mode, or if payload loopback (PaLB) is on

J 32 (Default) Sets jitter buffer depth to 32 bits

J128 Sets jitter buffer depth to 128 bits

Jrst Resets the jitter buffer

exit Exit JBUF and display FRAM

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 56: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu

3-14

FRAM Frame loss sensitivity. This function sets the criteria for declaring a loss of frame synchronization condition. When a loss of frame synchronization is declared, the FRM indicator lights and the multiplexer immediately begins to reestablish frame synchronization RED = not selected, GREEN = selected

f3/5 (Default) Frame loss is declared when three out of five consecutive framing patterns are in error

f2/4 Frame loss is declared when two out of four consecutive framing patterns are in error

f2/5 Frame loss is declared when two out of five consecutive framing patterns are in error

exit Exit FRAM and display TXYL

TXYL Transmit yellow alarm functionRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Off Yellow alarm is off (never active)

On Yellow alarm is on (always active)

Auto Automatically sends yellow alarm

ESF (Default) Automatically sends yellow alarm only in ESF

exit Exit TXYL and display TYPE

TYPE Multiplexer type. This function sets the basic multiplexer typeRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

VRM Sets unit to run as a variable-rate multiplexer

T1 (Default) Sets unit to run as an T1 multiplexer

exit Exit TYPE and display PRIM

PRIM Primary mode. This function sets the primary operating mode for the CM-5. When the common module is first plugged in it determines its mode based on the setting of the DIP switches on the MA-215 or MA-216. You can use PRIM to override these switch settingsRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

TERM Sets the mode to terminal

DI-A Sets the mode to DI-A (drop and insert multiplexer)

DI-B Sets the mode to DI-B (drop and insert multiplexer)

SPAR Sets the mode to spare (inactive)

exit Exit PRIM and display PLL

Table 3-3 CM-5 advanced configuration group menu (continued)

Function Group Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 57: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupCM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu

3-15

PLL Phase-locked loop filter. This function sets the bandwidth of the filter in the phase-locked loop (PLL) used to derive the transmit timing from the input T1. The PLL is used when the timing is set to loop, through, or externalRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Auto (Default) Determines the width based on the timing in use: narrow for loop or external timing, wide for through timing

Narr Forces the setting to narrow

Wide Forces the setting to wide

exit Exit PLL and display EIB

CUST Customer application menuRED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Std (Default) Standard alarm declaration criteria

KT Modified alarm criteria

STL Modified alarm criteria for use in studio-to-transmitter links (STLs)

EIB Electrical interface board. This parameter sets the common module to work with the Intraplex optical interface adapter (OIA) (MA-213M or MA-213L). The OIA allows you to use an optical interface with your ACS-160RED = not selected, GREEN = selected

Topt Time delay options. This parameter activates the time delay function (TDLY) on the Configuration Group menu (TDLY). The TDLY function is used to control delay characteristics of the CM-5TD’s integrated time delay capabilityRED = time delay option not activated,GREEN = time delay option activated

R Rx Reset receiver. This function resets the receive side of the common module by forcing it out of frame and allowing it to re synchronize

Rcpu Reset CPU. This function resets the central processing unit (CPU) of the common module. The effect is the same as removing and restoring power to the CM-5. This reset does not change the configuration settings on the CM-5

Table 3-3 CM-5 advanced configuration group menu (continued)

Function Group Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 58: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-16

3.5 T1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group) The TIME group selects the timing source that the T1 transmitter uses to clock the outgoing data stream.

When a CM-5 module is set up for use in a drop/insert multiplexer (that is, set to the DI-A or DI-B operating mode), the only member of the TIME group is through timing (THRU). No user setup is necessary or allowed.

When the CM-5 module is set up for use in a terminal multiplexer (set to TERM mode), four items appear in the TIME group:

• INT (Internal)

• Ext (External)

• Loop (Loop)

• Send (Not used)

In terminal multiplexers, the T1 transmitter timing mode can be set to internal, external, or loop by setting the appropriate function in the TIME group (Table 3-4) as follows:

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TIME.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through the available functions in the TIME group. The green (top) bi-level indicator turns on when the display shows the currently set selection, and the red (bottom) indicator turns on when the display shows any other selection.

3. To change the current timing setting, press down on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired setting, and then press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the timing source now on the display is active.

Table 3-4 TIME group

Timing Description

INT Internal. T1 transmitter of an internally timed terminal multiplexer derives its timing from the multiplexer’s own internal 1.544 oscillator

EXT External. The T1 transmitter of an externally timed terminal multiplexer derives its timing from the external timing source connected to the external timing input pins on the T1 I/O connector (see Table 2-6 on page 2-13)

LOOP Loop. The T1 transmitter of a loop-timed terminal multiplexer derives its timing from the received T1 signal: that is, the multiplexer’s T1 output is synchronized to its T1 input

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 59: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-17

3.5.1 Primary vs. Fallback Timing The timing mode selected by the TIME group setting is called the primary timing mode. ACS-160 series multiplexers also have a fallback timing mode. The factory setting for fallback timing is internal.

When configured for external, loop, or through timing, if the primary timing source becomes unavailable, the CM-5 performs an automatic, carefully controlled changeover to fallback timing—that is, to its own internal oscillator.

3.5.2 Timing Status IndicatorsThree indicators on the CM-5 (Loop, Int, and Ext) indicate the current T1 transmitter timing configuration (Table 3-5). If the CM-5 is using fallback timing, the indicator for the primary timing mode blinks, and the indicator for the fallback timing mode (factory set to internal) comes on steadily.

SEND SEND appears in the TIME group display when the CM-5 is set to drop & insert mode, but it is not used. Disregard this setting

THRU Through. Both CM-5 modules in an ACS-165 drop & insert multiplexer derive their transmitter timing through the T1 signal received by the other module. The T1 output of the DI-A module is synchronized to the T1 input of the DI-B module, while the T1 output of the DI-B module is synchronized to the T1 input of the DI-A module (Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7 on page 3-20)THRU is the only available primary timing mode on ACS-265 drop & insert multiplexers

Table 3-4 TIME group (continued)

Timing Description

Table 3-5 Timing status indicators

Label Description

INT Internal timing.

ON When lit, indicates the CM-5 transmitter is using its internal 1.544 MHz clock

EXT External timing

ON Indicates the CM-5 transmitter is using timing provided by an external clock

BLINKING Indicates external timing is selected for primary timing, but the module is currently using fallback timing

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 60: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-18

3.5.3 Timing Status FunctionsSeveral functions in the BLNK and RVU1 groups provide additional information on timing status.

To inspect these timing status functions, press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the desired group (BLNK or RVU1) appears on the display. Then, press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to view the contents of the selected group. These meanings of these functions are listed in Table 3-6 on page 3-18.

Loop Loop or through timing. On a terminal multiplexer, the indicators represent the following:

ON Indicates the CM-5 transmitter is loop timed

BLINKING Indicates that loop timing is selected for primary timing, however the module is currently using fallback timing

On a drop & insert multiplexer, the indicators represent the following:

ON Indicates the CM-5 transmitter is through timed

BLINKING Indicates that through timing is selected for primary timing, but the module is currently using fallback timing

Table 3-5 Timing status indicators (continued)

Label Description

Table 3-6 Timing status functions

Function Group Description

Ftim BLNK Fallback timing. When Ftim appears in the BLNK group, it indicates that the transmitter is in its fallback timing mode

TXLk RVU1 Transmit lock. When the transmit lock function is displayed, the bi-level ON/OFF indicator signifies the status of the T1 transmitter PLLa

Transmitter PLL is locked

Transmitter PLL is not locked

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 61: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-19

3.5.4 When To Use Each Timing ModeAppropriate uses of each of the four T1 transmitter timing modes are illustrated in following series of illustrations: Figure 3-4 through Figure 3-8 on page 3-21.

In ACS-160 systems synchronized to the digital network, both terminal multiplexers will normally be loop timed (Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-6).

In systems timed from one end and not synchronized to the carrier's network, one terminal will be internally (or externally) timed while the other is loop timed (Figure 3-5, Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-8 shows an ACS-160 system with an external timing source.

Figure 3-4 Point to point system synchronized to the network

TxRx RVU1 Transmit/Receive lock. When the transmit/receive lock function is displayed, the bi-level ON/OFF indicator signifies whether the transmitter timing is synchronized to the incoming T1 signal timing

Transmitter and receiver timing clocks are locked

Transmitter and receiver timing clocks are not locked

If the top and bottom indicators are toggling on and off, then the transmit and receive signals are not locked but their frequencies are close. In this case, each flash of the bottom (red) indicator corresponds to a relative phase change of one T1 Unit Interval (UI), which is 648ns. A relative phase change of one UI is called a "bit slip" by some T1 test set manufacturers.

a. When a CM-5 is using internal (INT) timing, primary or fallback, it is normal for the TxLk function to be off. However, when any other timing mode is in use (EXT, THRU, LOOP) it is normal for the TxLK function to be on and a fault condition is indicated when it is off.

Table 3-6 Timing status functions (continued)

Function Group Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 62: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-20

Figure 3-5 Point to point system internally timed from one end (not synchronized to the network)

Figure 3-6 Drop & insert system synchronized to the network

Figure 3-7 Drop & insert system internally timed from one end (not synchronized to the network)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 63: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-21

Figure 3-8 Point to point system externally timed from one end (not synchronized to the network)

3.5.5 Synchronized T1 SystemsMultiple ACS-160 systems can be synchronized by deriving their timing from the same timing source. One way to accomplish this is to daisy-chain the external timing outputs and inputs of several head-end terminal multiplexers (Figure 3-9 on page 3-22). Note that multiple ACS-160 systems loop-timed to the same network are also synchronized to each other and to the network. T1 systems are synchronized to prevent buffer overflows or underflows, generally called "slips," in network switching systems such as digital central offices, PBXs, and digital cross-connect systems.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 64: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-22

Figure 3-9 Multiple systems synchronized to a common timing source

3.5.6 Frame-Synchronized T1 SystemsSynchronized T1 systems, by definition, have equal bit rates (frequencies), and, except for a limited amount of jitter and wander, are phase-locked. But synchronized T1 systems are not, in general, frame-synchronized; that is, systems in a synchronized network may transmit a given time slot at different times.

Frame synchronization is generally required whenever it is necessary to have precise control over the relative delay times between multiple T1 circuits.

For example, frame synchronization can be useful in a mobile radio broadcast system using simulcasting (multiple transmitter sites). To maximize coverage, each transmitter in a simulcast system must transmit the same signal at a specific

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 65: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group)

3-23

time relative to the other transmitters. Frame synchronization allows fixed time delays to be added to individual circuits in order to achieve the exact desired transmission delay for each circuit.

Multiple ACS-160 systems can be frame-synchronized by using a framed T1 signal generator and using a CM-5TD common module with time delay on each multiplexer at the hub site (Location 1 in Figure 3-10). The CM-5TD locks the frame generator of the common module to the external signal.

Figure 3-10 Multiple frame-synchronized systems

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 66: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group)

3-24

3.6 T1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group) The T1 selection (TSEL) group is used to set the T1 frame format and line code. The functions available in the TSEL group are explained in Table 3-8. A detailed discussion of T1 frame formats and line codes appears in Section 6.3.1, T1 Digital Transmission, on page 6-19.

3.6.1 CSU Configuration The CM-5 is designed for internal or external channel service unit (CSU) applications. The CSU configuration must match the requirements of your T1 carrier provider.

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through the available functions in the TSEL group. The green (top) bi-level indicator turns on when the display shows the currently set selection for the CSU. The red (bottom) indicator turns on when the display shows the other configurations that are not selected for CSU.

To change either of the current settings, press down on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired setting, and then press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the function on the display is active.

3.6.2 Framing and Line Code Configuration If this installation includes a CSU, then the frame format and line code settings must be identical on both the multiplexers and the CSUs.

Use ESF framing and B8ZS line code whenever possible.

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through the available functions in the TSEL group. The green (top) bi-level indicator turns on when the display shows the currently set selection for frame format (ESF or SF) and line coding (B8ZS or AMI). The red (bottom) indicator turns on

Table 3-7 CSU configurations

Function Description

Off Disables the internal CM-5 CSU for operation with an external CSU. The settings that follow determine the configuration of the external CSU

ATT With this position on, the CM-5 will be compliant with AT&T Technical Reference 54016

ANSI With this position on, the CM-5 will be compliant with ANSI T1.403 ESF Data Link messages

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 67: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Frame Format and Line Code (TSEL Group)

3-25

when the display shows the configurations that are not selected for each function.

3. To change either of the current settings, press down on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired setting, and then press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the function on the display is active.

Table 3-8 Framing and line coding configurations

Function Description

SF Superframe format. An order frame format in which T1 frame (193 bits) are grouped into 12-frame superframes. Also referred to as D4. Generally, use the SF format only if the carrier’s network cannot support ESF

ESF Extended superframe format. A more recent frame format in which T1 frames are grouped into 24-frame extended superframes. The ESF format provides better error detection than SF and is generally recommended over SF. The only limitation of ESF is that some older carrier networks cannot support itThe SF and ESF formats are mutually exclusive functions. ESF is the factory default framing format

AMI Alternate mark inversion. A bipolar line code composed of (+) pulses, (-) pulses, and zeros. In an AMI-encoded signal, every pulse has the opposite polarity of the pulse that precedes it, regardless of the number of zeros between them. The major limitation of AMI is that it cannot support 64 kbps clear channel capability

B8ZS Bipolar with 8-zero substitution. A modified bipolar line code in which strings of eight zeros are replaced by zero substitution codes. Thus, T1 signals using the B8ZS line code maintain sufficient ones density, regardless of the number of zeros in the data, to support unrestricted 64 Kbps clear channel capability. The only limitation of B8ZS is that some older CSUs and carrier networks cannot support itThe AMI and B8ZS line codes are mutually exclusive functions. B8ZS is the factory default line code

PDE Pulse Density Enforcement. The data must meet the ones density requirements specified in AT&T Technical Reference 54016 or ANSI T1.403 ESF Data Link messages, which requires that when AMI is engaged, approximately 1 in every 8 bits must be a one and no more than 15 consecutive zeros can be sent. If the data violates this requirement for ones density, the PDE will put ones in the output data to ensure density compliance (it will also put errors in the data).

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 68: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-26

3.7 Installing and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3.7.1 IntroductionCommon module redundancy is available in all ACS-160 series multiplexers. This section describes the installation, configuration, and function of redundant CM-5s. The redundancy feature of the CM-5 can only be exploited using the MA-215 or MA-217B module adapters. (An MA-216 module adapter does not support common module redundancy.)

3.7.2 OverviewA multiplexer equipped with redundant CM-5s will automatically switch over to a backup CM-5 when it detects a line or hardware failure. When the line or hardware failure is repaired, the backup CM-5 can revert (automatically or manually) to the primary CM-5.

Note: Redundant CM-5s are used as a redundant hardware system and cannot be used for line redundancy.

3.7.3 Installation of Redundant ModulesThe primary and backup CM-5s share an MA-215 (or MA-217B) module adapter. The primary CM-5 installs into the same slot number as the module adapter. The backup CM-5 installs in the slot adjacent to the primary CM-5 and connects to the shared module adapter with a 30-pin ribbon cable (see Figure 3-11 on page 26).

Figure 3-11 Top view showing backplane connections of the primary and backup CM-5s and a shared MA-215

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 69: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-27

Redundant CM-5s can also be installed in a 1RU shelf, as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-12 Front view of an ACS-167 with redundant CM-5s

Figure 3-13 Rear view of an ACS-167 with a shared MA-215

3.7.3.1 Compatibility with Non-Redundant CM-5sRedundant CM-5s will not function with non-redundant CM-5s. If you have a redundant CM-5, verify that the CM-5 sharing the MA-215 or MA-217B is also a redundant CM-5. To determine if the CM-5 has redundancy capability, look for the revised version number label on the circuit board. Redundant CM-5 (or CM-5TD) modules have a version of REV B8 or higher stamped on the circuit boards.

Note: Redundant CM-5s are fully interchangeable. Any redundant CM-5 can be used as a primary terminal, DI-A or DI-B multiplexer. Any redundant CM-5 can also be used as a backup terminal, backup DI-A, or backup DI-B multiplexer.

3.7.3.2 Configuring the Redundancy Group (REDN)Redundant CM-5s have a special group added to the front panel user interface, called the redundancy (REDN) group. This group is only visible on the backup CM-5 (it is suppressed on the primary CM-5). Depress the group switch on the backup CM-5 until REDN appears. Table 3-9 on page 28 shows the REDN group menu items and their parameters.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 70: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-28

Caution: The primary and backup CM-5s must be identically configured on their user interfaces. The backup CM-5 cannot automatically learn and configure itself to the primary CM-5 configuration. The basic menu functions for the CM-5 are provided in Section 1.6.1, Function Groups and the Configuration Switches, on page 1-12.

Table 3-9 REDN group menu functions

Sub-menu Item Description

CNFG Configuration sub-menu

OFF Never switch to a backup

RVRTa Revertive switching. Will switch to the backup on detection of a failure in the primary, then will switch back to primary when failure condition is cleared

NRVT Non-revertive switching. Will switch to a backup when a failure is detected in the primary but will not switch back

Exit Exit the CNFG sub-menu

SWCH Switching sub-menu. Displays the status of the backup or primary switch. If the SET/NEXT indicator is green (top), then the backup CM-5 is active. If the indicator is red (bottom), then the primary CM-5 is active.This switch can also be used to manually toggle from the backup to primary CM-5 or from the primary to backup CM-5.

LOF ON Loss of frame. Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving a loss of frame condition

OFFa Deactivates the LOF switching

LOS ON Loss of signal. Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving a loss of signal condition

OFFa Deactivates the LOS switching

YEL ON Yellow alarm. Switch to the backup if the primary receives a yellow alarm

OFFa Deactivates the YEL switching

AIS ON Alarm indication signal. Switch to the backup if the primary is receiving an AIS signal

OFFa Deactivates the AIS switching

a. Indicates the factory default

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 71: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-29

3.7.4 Remote Control of Redundant CM-5sThe backup CM-5 shelf address must be the same as the primary CM-5 shelf address. You cannot talk to an inactive CM-5 over the remote port, but the primary CM-5 does respond normally to ISiCL commands.

When a backup CM-5 takes over the function of the primary CM-5, an ALERT condition will be generated. A STATUS? query from a remote interface will receive the following response:

When the backup CM-5 is activated, it can be remotely controlled. When the backup is ready to return control to the primary CM-5, all configuration information for the channel modules is transmitted from the backup to the primary CM-5 before switching.

3.7.5 Functional Description

3.7.5.1 Redundant CM-5 Operation in a Terminal or DI-A MultiplexerIntraplex configuration specifications require a multiplexer bus master and one or more slaves. A primary CM-5 configured for terminal or DI-A mode will automatically power-up in the master mode. While in the master mode, the primary CM-5 will constantly search for other CM-5 slaves on the shelf. If the primary finds any slaves, it will periodically report the status of the slaves through the multiplexer bus. This report will include the mode, hardware status, and line status (Figure 3-14 on page 30).

Note: The process of transmitting shelf data from a primary to a backup CM-5 is slow. With a full shelf of 18 modules, it can take up to two full minutes for the primary CM-5 to transmit an entire shelf image to the backup CM-5.

* OK > > > ALERT AT SHELF < < < SWITCHED TO REDUNDANT COMMON MODULE;

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 72: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-30

Figure 3-14 Redundant CM-5s

The backup CM-5 monitors the report from the primary CM-5. If the report fails to arrive, or if the report indicates a hardware failure or a line failure, then the backup CM-5 will compare the report to the switching criteria set in the REDN group (see Configuring the Redundancy Group (REDN) on page 27). If the failure and switch criteria match, then the backup CM-5 will take control of the MA-215. A signal generated from the module adapter will take the failed primary CM-5 off the multiplexer bus.

3.7.5.2 Redundant CM-5 Operation in a Drop/Insert Multiplexer In a drop/insert multiplexer, the primary CM-5 in the DI-A mode is the multiplexer bus master. The DI-B CM-5 does not hold channel card configuration information. The DI-A CM-5 will query the DI-B CM-5 for its status, and report to the DI-B backup CM-5 (Figure 3-15 on page 31). The DI-B backup CM-5 will then take appropriate action.

Since DI-B CM-5s do not hold channel card configuration information, the switchover from a backup DI-B CM-5 to a primary DI-B CM-5 is fixed at two seconds.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 73: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-31

Figure 3-15 Redundant CM-5 functions in a drop/insert multiplexer

3.7.5.3 Switching from a Backup to a Primary CM-5 If in revert (RVRT) configuration, the backup CM-5 will automatically revert control back to the primary CM-5 when it detects that a hardware failure has been corrected.

If you have selected a line failure (LOF, LOS, YEL, AIS) for a switching criteria, then the configuration should be set to non-revertant (NVRT). The reason for this requirement lies with the switching mechanics. For example, if a yellow alarm is received and a switch occurs, the primary CM-5 will no longer report a yellow alarm because the signals are no longer coming into it. If the switching is set to revert (RVRT), then the backup CM-5 will think the failure is repaired and will switch control back to the primary CM-5. The primary CM-5 will once again detect an alarm, and another backup switch will occur. This cycling of the switch back and forth between redundant CM-5s will continue until the alarm condition is removed.

The non-revertant configuration should also be set if the switches for loss of frame (LOF) or loss of signal (LOS) are activated (ON). This is also due to switching mechanics. The module adapter directs the T1 line signals to only one CM-5. If the backup CM-5 is active, then it has the T1 line signal. The primary CM-5 can never regain the line signal and therefore will remain in a failed condition.

3.7.5.4 Manual SwitchingIf a line failure condition occurs and is later cleared but the control is not reverted to the primary CM-5, then you can manually switch by:

• removing and reinstalling the primary CM-5, or

• manually switching at the front panel display (REDN >> SWCH)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 74: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupInstalling and Configuring Redundant CM-5s

3-32

3.7.5.5 Switching TimeA switch will be initiated 50ms after a report is received that meets the switching criteria. The total time for switching from the primary CM-5 to a backup CM-5 (or vice versa) is less than 100 ms, but will result in a loss of frame and signal during that period of time.

When reverting back to the primary, the backup CM-5 must first transmit the channel card configuration settings to the primary CM-5. While the backup CM-5 is transmitting the configuration settings, the front panel display will read "WAIT." The transmission of the configuration settings can take up to two minutes to transmit the settings for a full shelf of 18 channel modules. When transmission of the settings is complete, the "WAIT" display will clear and the switchover will be initiated (switchover will appear instantaneous).

3.7.6 CM-5TD Time Delay Common Modules This information also applies to the redundant time delay common module, CM-5TD. Control of the delay feature on the redundant CM-5TD can be accomplished by remote control (see Section 3.8 on page 3-33). However, there are a few additional requirements for configuration of redundant time delay CM-5s. The time delay function (TDLY) in the basic menu group and the time delay parameter (Topt) in the advanced menu group must be configured identically on all CM-5TD configurations. Also, the multiplexer bus address (1-36) of each CM-5TD must be unique.

3.7.7 Network Management Network management functions outlined in your multiplexer installation and operation manual can be performed normally with any active CM-5. However, the backup CM-5s are not addressable by the network.

As with non-redundant CM-5s, each redundant CM-5 (primary and backup), must have the same data rate and DS0 time slot in the COMM menu group. The communication protocols for the redundant CM-5s (primary and backup) must be identical for network communication. See Section 7.9, Network Management Communications, on page 7-55 for additional information.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 75: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupIntegrated time delay - CM-5TD (optional)

3-33

3.8 Integrated time delay - CM-5TD (optional) The TD-1 T1 Delay Module is now fully integrated into the CM-5TD, no longer requiring a separate channel module. The CM-5TD option provides a programmable time delay of between 6 and 131076 bit times (between 3.89 �s and 84.89 ms) in the receive path of the CM-5TD.

3.8.1 CM-5TD SetupIf your ACS-160 Series multiplexer has the optional delay capability, it will have a CM-5TD common module. The CM-5TD allows you to program a time delay in the receive T1 path.

3.8.1.1 Activating the Delay FeatureTo activate the delay feature, use the following procedure. Note this is normally set at the factory before shipment.

1. Access the advanced configuration group.

2. Press the SET/NEXT switch down until Topt is displayed.

3. Note which On/Off indicator is lit. If the red indicator is lit, the delay feature is off. If the green indicator is lit, the feature is on.

4. Press SET/NEXT up twice to toggle the delay feature on or off.

5. When the delay feature is on, the TDLY item is available in the basic configuration group menu.

3.8.1.2 Setting the CM-5TD SubaddressWith Topt set on (see above), follow this procedure to set the time delay subaddress. This value is the card subaddress for the time delay module incorporated into the CM-5TD common module. The card subaddress can be set from 1 through 36.

1. On the basic configuration group, use GROUP to display TDLY.

2. Press SET/NEXT down to access the delay parameters. TDSA (time delay subaddress) is displayed.

3. Press SET/NEXT up to select TDSA. The display shows the currently programmed address.

4. Press SET/NEXT down to begin editing. The underline indicates the digit to be edited.

5. Press SET/NEXT up to change the first digit.

6. Press SET/NEXT down to select the second digit; press SET/NEXT up to change its value.

7. Press SET/NEXT down to enter the value. The red On/Off indicator is lit to indicate that the value is not yet active.

8. Press SET/NEXT up twice to confirm and activate the new address.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 76: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupIntegrated time delay - CM-5TD (optional)

3-34

3.8.1.3 Setting Local Control On or OffThe following procedure describes how to enable or disable local control of the delay feature.

1. On the basic function menu use GROUP to display TDLY.

2. Press SET/NEXT down to access the delay parameters.

3. Press SET/NEXT down again to display LCL (local).

4. Note which On/Off indicator is lit. If the green indicator is lit, local control is enabled. If the red indicator is lit, local control is disabled and the delay feature can only be controlled remotely using ISiCL commands.

5. Press SET/NEXT up twice to toggle LCL on or off.

3.8.2 OperationThe CM-5TD has a set of LED indicators located behind the TIMING indicators. Table 3-10 describes these indicators.

The delay setting is determined by the number of bits used in the buffer. The buffer depth can range from 6 bits to 131,076 bits. Each T1 (1.544 Mbps) bit has a duration of 647.67 ns, this allows you to set a delay time ranging from 3.89 µS to 84.00 mS.

The delay is set by sending a 17-bit binary number to the CM-5TD; the CM-5TD takes this number and adds five to it, and uses the result to set the buffer depth in bits.

The 17-bit number can be sent to the CM-5TD in two ways — through the RS-232 serial remote port using ISiCL P codes. Detailed instructions for remotely configuring the CM-5TD can be found in Section 7.8, Configuring the CM-5TD Delay Feature, on page 7-49.

Caution: Valid numbers are binary 00000000000000001 through 11111111111111111 (1 through 131,071 decimal). Do not send all zeroes.

Table 3-10 CM-5TD indicators

Indicator Description

BUF Buffer. This yellow indicator lights when the delay buffer overflows or underflows, indicating that the input clock frequency is going outside the PLL lock range

LOCK This green indicator lights when the actual delay is identical to the configured delay

SRVC This green indicator lights when the delay functionality is activated

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 77: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3-35

3.9 T1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3.9.1 IntroductionThis section provides information on the optical interface adapters (OIAs) produced for use with the Intraplex ACS-160 Series T1 multiplexers. These adapters enable the multiplexers to connect to fiber optic cables. A CM-5F common module is required for use with OIAs.

Each OIA consists of two printed circuit boards, the Electrical Interface Board (EIB) and the Light Interface Board (LIB), that are bolted together and attached to a single face plate (See Figure 3-16). The CM-5F common module has additional hardware to support optics.

Figure 3-16 Fiber Optic Interface adapter

On the ACS-165 and ACS-168 drop/insert multiplexers, one T1 port may be equipped with a fiber interface while the other has an electrical interface.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 78: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3-36

There are two OIA models available, as described in Table 3-11 on page 3-36. Both have the same physical appearance and layout.

3.9.2 InstallationThe OIA plugs into the rear of a multiplexer, taking the place of the standard electrical module adapter (MA-215 or MA-217B) normally used with the CM-5. The OIA takes up two physical slots.

In the ACS-163 and ACS-167 terminal multiplexers, the OIA occupies slots 1 and 2 on the rear. The CM-5F common module occupies its normal position in slot 1 on the front. No channel or common module may be inserted into physical slot 2. Slots 3 through 18 are available to hold channel modules.

In the ACS-165 and ACS-168 drop/insert multiplexers, two OIAs are required. These occupy slots 1 through 4 on the rear. The DI-A and DI-B CM-5Fs that would normally occupy physical slots 1 and 2 on the front must instead be inserted in slots 1 and 3. No modules may be placed in slots 2 and 4; slots 5 through 18 remain available for channel modules.

3.9.3 ALERT IndicatorThe OIAs contain an ALERT indicator, located on the face plate. This indicator lights up in response to any of three alarm conditions:

Transmit Activity Alarm: Indicates an absence of transmit activity, measured at the TTL (transistor-transistor logic) input to the EIB.

Transmit Level Alarm: Indicates that the transmit light source (LED or laser) has failed.

Receive Lock Alarm: Indicates that the VCO (voltage-controlled oscillator) is not locked onto the incoming data stream. When this alarm occurs, the data output to the common module defaults to all zeroes.

When any of these alarms is in effect, a card-level ALERT signal is sent to the multiplexer common module. The alarms can be monitored individually by remote access (see Section 7.5.2, Determining the Alert/Alarm Status of a Multiplexer, on page 7-22).

Table 3-11 Optical Interface Adapter models

Model Wavelength Fiber Type Light Source

MA-213M 1310 nm multimode LED

MA-213L 1310 nm single mode Laser

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 79: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3-37

3.9.4 Switch SettingsThere is one switch bank (SW1) on the OIA, mounted on the EIB and visible from the top of the unit as shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Top view of the EIB board, showing the configuration switches

The MODE 1 and MODE 2 switches work together to set the common module operating mode, as shown in Table .)

Table 3-12 Normal switch settings (SW1, Positions 3 & 4)

Type Switch Up Switch Down

Remote Set OIA to local control (normal)

Set OIA to remote control

B8ZS Set to use AMI line code Set to use B8ZS line code (normal)

Table 3-13 Mode switches (SW1, Positions 1 & 2)

Mode 1 Setting

Mode 2 Setting Result

DOWN DOWN Set common module mode to terminal (TERM)

UP DOWN Set common module mode to drop/insert A (DI-A)

DOWN UP Set common module mode to drop/insert B (DI-B)

UP UP Set common module mode to spare (SPAR)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 80: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3-38

3.9.5 Remote Control InterfaceAlthough optical interface adapters plug into the rear of Intraplex multiplexers like other module adapters, they are treated like channel modules by the Intraplex Simple Command Language (ISiCL) remote control system. See Section 7, Remote Control Operation for information on how to use ISiCL.

All OIAs report themselves as type 11 cards. The card address for OIAs is fixed in the module software; an OIA used with a terminal or DI-A CM-5F always has card address 1, and an OIA used with a DI-B CM-5F always has a card address of 3.

3.9.5.1 P CodeThere is one P code for an OIA. It represents the E1 line code, as shown below:

3.9.5.2 S CodeThere is one S code for an OIA. Like the P code, this is a number displayed in both decimal and binary form. The three least significant digits of the binary number represent the conditions shown on Table 3-14 on page 3-39. The five most significant digits are not used.

A typical OIA response to a STATUS? query looks like this:

P01 = 0 (B00000000)

P01 = 1 (B00000001)

T1 line code set to B8ZS

T1 line code set to AMI

* OKCHANNEL CARD 1, TYPE 11S01 =127 (B01111111);

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 81: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3-39

3.9.6 SpecificationsThere are significant differences between the LED and LASER OIA models. Table 3-15 below and Table 3-16 on page 3-40 illustrate the differences.

Table 3-14 Remote status messages (S Code)

Binary Digits

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value Description

B 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 Transmit activity alarm in effect. No transmit activity is detected at the TTL input to the LIB

1 Transmit activity normal

B 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 0 Transmit level alarm in effect. The light source (laser or LED) has failed

1 Transmit level normal

B 0 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 0 Receive lock alarm. The VCO is not locked onto the incoming data stream

1 Receive lock normal

B 0

1

1

1

1

1 0 0 0 Not used

1 Not used

Table 3-15 Features of OIA models

Feature MA-213M MA-213L

Optical source LED LASER

Wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm

Fiber type multimode single mode

Output power, nominal -12 dBm modulated 0 dBm modulated

Receiver sensitivity, typical a -39 dB average power

-39 dB average power

System gain, guaranteed 25 dB 36 dB

Operating distance, typical b 20 kilometers (12 miles)

70 kilometers(43 miles)

a. Receiver incorporates optical automatic gain adjustment to prevent saturation at any level.

b. Typical distances calculated using these parameters: System design margin of 6 dB; connector loss of 1 dB at each end; splice loss of 0.2 dB every 2 km; cable loss of 0.75 dB/km for 50/125 �m multimode cable, 0.3 dB for 8/125 mm single mode cable.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 82: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Multiplexer SetupT1 Fiber Optic Interface Adapters

3-40

Table 3-16 Specifications that apply to both OIA models

Feature Description

Optical interface ST-type optical connectors: 1 transmit, 1 receive

External timing input RJ-11 jack allows input of 1.544 kHz, RS-422 external timing signal to the T1 common module

Remote port DB-9P, RS-232C for remote control and monitoring

Switches Selection of T1 common module operating mode: Terminal, DI-A or DI-BSelection of EIB operating mode: local or remoteSelection of T1 line code: AMI or B8ZS

Alarm indication One indicator located on rear panel responds to any of the following alarm conditions:

• Transmit activity failure

• Transmit level too low

• Receive signal not locked

Power consumption 2.6 watts nominal

Environmental Temperature 0� - 50� CHumidity 10% - 90% operating

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 83: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 4

Channel Module Overview

What is in this section?4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

4.2 Introduction to Intraplex Channel Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

4.3 Channel Module Configuration Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

4.4 Adding Channel Modules to Existing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 84: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewOverview

4-2

4.1 OverviewThis section provides an overview of channel modules and general guidelines for configuring them. For detailed information on the channel modules included in this system, refer to the individual channel module manuals.

For information on configuring channel modules using the remote access and control feature, see Section 7.6, Channel Module Remote Access, on page 7-29.

4.2 Introduction to Intraplex Channel Modules

4.2.1 Channel Module Types Intraplex produces a wide variety of channel modules for the ACS-160 Series multiplexers. Channel module types include:

Voice Modules: Voice modules provide digital transport of telephony, fax and modem circuits. Signaling options include E&M Types I, II, III, V, loop start/ground start, ARD and transmission. These modules provide:

• 2-wire Foreign Exchange Office (FXO/FXS) PCM and ADPCM voice

• 4-wire E&M PCM and ADPCM voice

• wideband 7.5 kHz voice

• Motorola SECURENETTM secure digital voice

Data Modules: Data modules provide digital transport of one-way or full-duplex data circuits, supporting a variety of data rates and formats including synchronous, asynchronous and plesiochronous. These modules include:

• high-speed synchronous data up to 1.984 Mbps for 10Base LAN, V.35, X.21, RS-449 and TTL

• 10BaseT Ethernet LAN bridging

• four-port asynchronous data up to 38.4 kbps for RS-232 and RS-449

• five-port synchronous data up to 19.2 kbps for RS-232

• high-speed synchronous data that can be optionally decoupled from the network timing at any data rate up to 1.984 Bbps

Program Audio Modules: Program audio modules provide digital transport for signals up to 20 kHz stereo. They are available with analog or AES/EBU input or output. These modules include:

• linear, uncompressed 15 kHz stereo audio with minimum delay

• apt-X100 4:1 compressed audio for signals up to 20 Khz stereo with low delay

• ITU-T J.42 audio that employs 14:11 and 15:11 instantaneous companding

• full-duplex codec modules that provide MPEG Layer 2 and Layer 3 (MP3) compressed audio for the highest fidelity stereo audio relative to bandwidth

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 85: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewIntroduction to Intraplex Channel Modules

4-3

Video Modules: Video codec modules support H.261 compliant video transmissions in simplex and duplex configurations. Applications for these modules include imaging, surveillance, remote monitoring, conferencing, and video distribution. These modules include:

• NTSC and PAL video

• encoder, decoder, and duplex configurations

• 16 kps–1.984 Mbps

Additional enhanced features of Intraplex access products are available to support low delay, fast synchronization and other robust transmission requirements. Call Intraplex for assistance with network design, planning, application support, training, and the latest listing of available channel modules: (978) 486-9000.

4.2.2 Simplex vs. Duplex Channel ModulesMost circuit types, such as voice and two-way data circuits, are full-duplexa; that is, they support simultaneous two-way operation. Full-duplex circuits require identical full-duplex (transmit/receive) channel modules at both ends of the channel they occupy within an ACS-160 system. Other circuit types, such as program audio channels, are simplex; that is, they always have a transmitter module at one end and a receiver module at the other.

Figure 4-1 on page 4-4 illustrates channel module configuration by showing multiple channel modules of various types in a three-site system, using both terminal and drop/insert multiplexers.

4.2.3 Channel Modules in Point-to-Point versus Point-to-Multipoint Circuits Most circuits provided by ACS-160 systems are point-to-point. However, several types of channel modules can be configured for point-to-multipoint operation. For example, a single program audio transmitter module and several program audio receiver modules can be set up in a point-to-multipoint or "broadcast" circuit configuration, allowing multiple locations to receive the same program audio signal without the need for tandem decoding and re-encoding at each receive site. To achieve this, set all the receive modules to the same time slots as the transmit module.

Similarly, data polling channel modules can be used to configure point-to-multipoint data circuits. In this arrangement, all the polling modules are set to use the same time slot, but each responds only when it receives the Request-To-Send (RTS) signal.

a. 1 Most full-duplex (two-way) channel modules can also be set up to operate in a simplex (one-way) mode.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 86: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewIntroduction to Intraplex Channel Modules

4-4

Figure 4-1 Setting channel module direction and time slots

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 87: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewIntroduction to Intraplex Channel Modules

4-5

4.2.4 Relationship Between Circuits and Time Slots As discussed in Section 6.3.1, T1 Digital Transmission, on page 6-19, the T1 circuit consists of twenty-four 64 kbps time slots in each direction.

Some types of channel modules use a single time slot to provide one or more circuits. For example, a single-port data module may use one time slot to transmit one data circuit operating at 64 kbps, while a five-port data module may use one time slot to transmit up to five data circuits, each operating at 9.6 kbps.

Other types of channel modules require multiple time slots per circuit. For example, wideband data modules may be configured to operate at rates up to 1.536 Mbps and therefore may use from one to twenty-four time slots, simplex or full duplex, within a given T1 circuit. Similarly, high fidelity audio channel modules may use up to eighteen time slots to support one 15 kHz, CD-quality stereo circuit.

Keep in mind, however, that one-way channels (high fidelity audio modules and data modules operating in simplex mode) use time slots in one direction of the T1 circuit only; the same time slots remain available for other one-way channels in the return direction.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 88: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewChannel Module Configuration Guidelines

4-6

4.3 Channel Module Configuration Guidelines

4.3.1 Physical SlotsChannel modules may be placed into any available physical slots in the multiplexer. Make sure that an appropriate module adapter is installed behind each channel module.

As described in Section 4.2.4, Relationship Between Circuits and Time Slots, on page 4-5, a given channel module may use one or more of the twenty-four 64 kbps time slots provided by each direction of a T1 circuit. In addition, unless the individual channel module manual states otherwise, a given channel module may be assigned to any available time slot or group of time slots within a T1 circuit, regardless of its physical location (slot) in an ACS-160 Series multiplexer. Therefore, it is important to distinguish physical slots on the multiplexer from time slots within T1 circuits. They are not directly related.

4.3.2 Time Slots Terminal Multiplexers. An ACS-163 (or ACS-167) terminates one T1 circuit. Therefore, regardless of the number of physical slots available, the total number of 64 kbps time slots occupied by the channel modules cannot exceed 24.

An ACS-166 (or ACS-169) terminates two separate T1 circuits; the channel modules for each circuit may occupy up to 24 time slots.

Drop/Insert Multiplexers. An ACS-165 (or ACS-168) terminates two interconnected T1 circuits: one via the DI-A common module, and one via the DI-B common module. All incoming time slots from each T1 circuit that do not terminate at the drop/insert multiplexer automatically pass through to the outgoing side of the other T1 circuit.

Therefore, regardless of the number of physical slots available, the total number of time slots occupied by channel modules terminating channels of the DI-A circuit is limited to 24 minus the number of through time slots from DI-B to DI-A. Similarly, the total number of time slots that can be occupied by channel modules terminating channels of the DI-B circuit is limited to 24 minus the number of through time slots from DI-A to DI-B.

A channel module set to transmit on a given time slot will override the data coming through on that time slot from the other T1 direction.

For example, suppose a drop/insert multiplexer contains only one channel module, set up to transmit via the DI-A common module on time slots 4 and 5. In that case, on the outgoing T1 signal of the DI-A module, time slots 1 to 3 and 6 to 24 will contain data passed through from the incoming T1 signal of the DI-B module, while time slots 4 and 5 will contain data generated by the local channel module.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 89: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewChannel Module Configuration Guidelines

4-7

On an Intraplex drop/insert multiplexer, the channels passing from the DI-A circuit to the DI-B circuit are independent of those passing from the DI-B circuit to the DI-A circuit; the same time slot may contain a full-duplex voice or data channel, or it may contain unrelated one-way channels in each direction.

The total capacity in each direction is 24 time slots; unused time slots in one direction cannot be added to the time slot capacity in the other direction.

Assigning Time Slots. Generally, a channel module may be assigned to use any available time slot (or group of time slots). However, when assigning time slot usage in a multiplexer that contains a variety of channel modules, keep the following points in mind:

1. If the system contains a wideband data module, set the other modules to use the lower time slots (1 through N), and the wideband module to use time slots starting just above them (N+1 and up). Later, if you wish to increase the data rate on the wideband module, you can do so without having to change the settings on the other modules.

2. In a system where the T1 circuit is using AMI line coding, circuit availability can be impaired by insufficient ones density in the digital bitstream. There are several things you can do to prevent this:

In a system that has several program audio channels (for example, three bandwidth-efficient audio modules each using four time slots), separate their time slot assignments by at least one.

You can do this by assigning a different type of channel between them (for example, program audio on time slots 1 through 4, voice on time slot 5, program audio on time slots 6 through 9, data on time slot 10, and so forth).

Alternatively, if the system allows, you may leave an unused time slot between each program audio time slot group (unused time slots are filled with "all ones" by default).

3. If a program audio module contains a data scrambler, you may turn the scrambler on.

4. When there are several individual 64 kbps data circuits, separate these by placing lower-rate data, voice, or unused time slots between them.

5. When using wideband data modules, set them either to use alternate time slots, or to use only 56 kbps per time slot.

Note: The above considerations are not necessary when the T1 circuit is set up for B8ZS line coding. Use B8ZS whenever possible.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 90: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewChannel Module Configuration Guidelines

4-8

4.3.3 Channel Module Communication Direction Every Intraplex channel module has a switch that determines whether it communicates via the DI-A or DI-B port on a drop/insert multiplexer; this switch is generally labeled TX-A or TERM. Consult individual channel module manuals to determine the location and labeling of this switch on each type of module.

In a terminal multiplexer, this switch must always be set on. In a drop/insert multiplexer, set this switch on to have the module transmit and receive via the DI-A T1 port (that is, the T1 line connected to the CM-5 module set to DI-A mode), and off to have the module communicate via the DI-B T1 port.

On some older channel modules, there are two switches; one selects the transmit direction and the other selects the receive direction. These two switches should always be set to opposite directions:

• In a terminal multiplexer or to communicate via the DI-A port in a drop/insert multiplexer, set the switches to transmit A, receive B

• To communicate via the DI-B port in a drop/insert multiplexer, set the switches to transmit B, receive A

The use of the transmit direction switches is illustrated in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4. Section 6.2.1.1, Drop and Insert Operation: The Role of the Signal Bus, on page 6-2, describes the effect of these switches on the internal working of the multiplexer.

It is important to note that the channel module transmit direction (A or B) denotes which CM-5 common module the channel communicates through; it does not correspond to a particular geographic direction such as East or West, or to a particular topological direction, such as towards Location 2 or towards Location 1.

For example, in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4 the voice modules at the two ends of Circuit #2 are both set to transmit in the A direction, even though they actually transmit in opposite directions over the same T1 facility. The transmit A direction setting means that each communicates via the CM-5 module in physical slot 1 of its respective shelf: the terminal module at Site 1, and the DI-A module at Site 2.

4.3.4 Power Available for Channel Modules Main Shelf. Each shelf's power supply must provide sufficient power for all the common and channel modules in that shelf. Some module adapters also contain active components that draw power. Table 4-1 on page 4-9 lists the nominal power requirements for all current Intraplex common and channel modules, and for those module adapters with active components.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 91: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewChannel Module Configuration Guidelines

4-9

Table 4-1 Nominal power requirements for modules and module adapters

ModuleNominal Power

Used (Watts) ModulesNominal Power

Used (Watts)

Common Modules

CM-3A 3.1 CM-5F 3.1

CM-5 3.1 CM-5TD 3.4

Channel Modules

D-100 3.0 PR-D250 3.4

DA-191A/B 1.2 PT-D350 3.0

DS-64NC 2.5 PR-D350 3.4

DS-961D 1.2 PT-D351 3.1

DT-7 2.0 PR-D351 3.4

PT-150A 4.7 PT-D355 3.0

PR-150A 6.6 PR-D355 3.4

PT-250 3.0 TM-5 0.4

PR-250 3.4 VF-15 2.3

PT-350B 3.0 VF-16 2.3

PR-350B 3.4 VF-17 2.3

PT-355 3.0 VF-18 2.3

PR-355 3.4 VF-25 2.0

PT-D150 4.7 VF-27 2.0

PR-D150 6.6 VF-75 7.8

PT-D250 3.0 VCP-1SN 8.8

Active Module Adaptersa

MA-213M 2.6 MA-412 1.0

MA-213L 2.6 MA-413 1.0

MA-215 1.0 MA-414 1.0

MA-216 1.0 MA-415 1.0

MA-404 1.0 MA-416 1.0

a. Module adapters not on this list have no active components and need not be taken into consideration when calculating power requirements.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 92: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewChannel Module Configuration Guidelines

4-10

Caution: Use Table 4-1 as a rough guide only - channel modules actually draw varying amounts of current from each of several different voltages in the multiplexer. When adding new modules to a multiplexer with a 50-watt power supply, if the nominal power requirement exceeds 35 watts, call Intraplex Customer Service to determine whether that configuration may in fact overload the power supply.

Remember to include the CM-5 common modules at 3.1 watts each; one in a terminal multiplexer, and two in a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer. Redundant CM-5s must also be included in calculating total power consumption. For example, a drop/insert multiplexer with full common module redundancy will have 37.6 watts available for channel modules on its main shelf (50 watts minus 37.6 watts for four CM-5 modules).

Intraplex produces an optional 100-watt power supply for use in full-size (3RU) multiplexers whose power requirements exceed 50 watts.

4.3.4.1 Power Supply Redundancy All 3RU ACS-160 Series multiplexers may be equipped with two identical power supplies for redundancy. If the primary supply fails, the redundant supply ensures uninterrupted operation.

The second supply is strictly a backup to the first, not an increase in available power; the total shelf power is the individual capacity of either supply. For example, an ACS-163 terminal multiplexer equipped with a single 50 watt power supply would have 46.9 watts available for channel modules (50 watts minus 3.1 watts for the CM-5 module); equipped with two 50 watt power supplies, it would still have 46.9 watts available for channel modules, not 96.9 watts. There are, however, larger power supplies available that can provide the necessary power. (See Section 8.10, Power, on page 8-5 for further details.)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 93: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewAdding Channel Modules to Existing Systems

4-11

4.4 Adding Channel Modules to Existing Systems It is not necessary to power down an existing system in order to add new channel modules to it. However, to install new channel modules into an existing system without affecting other in-service channels, always follow these two basic rules. Before installing a new channel module:

1. Verify that sufficient shelf power is available (see the previous section).

2. Verify time slot availability and set time slot and channel direction accordingly.

4.4.0.1 Physical Slot SelectionThe new channel module can be placed into any available physical slot on the shelf.

4.4.0.2 Setting Channel Module DirectionSet the channel module transmit/receive direction using the guidelines listed in Section 4.3.3, Channel Module Communication Direction, on page 4-8.

4.4.0.3 Setting Channel Module Transmit/Receive Time SlotUse these guidelines for setting the transmit and receive time slots for each channel modules (Figure 4-1 on page 4-4 illustrates this information).

1. In each direction of transmission, always set up the two channel modules at either end of a new channel to use the same time slot or slots. That is, on a channel between Locations 1 and 2, the transmit time slot at Location 1 must be the same as the receive time slot at Location 2, and the transmit time slot at Location 2 must be the same as the receive time slot at Location 1.

2. When adding a pair of one-way modules to transmit from Point A to Point B and a similar pair to transmit from Point B to Point A, use the same time slot in both directions of transmission, if possible. This is not a requirement, but should reduce the chance of making record-keeping errors.

3. Always select time slots that are not occupied by other channels in any T1 facility traversed by the new channel. In drop/insert systems with four or more locations, be careful not to ignore time slots occupied by channels between intermediate drop/insert multiplexers.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 94: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Channel Module OverviewAdding Channel Modules to Existing Systems

4-12

4.4.0.4 Channel Module Installation Procedure1. At Location 1, install and wire the module adapter provided with the channel

module (see Figure 4-2).

2. Install the channel module at Location 1.

Caution: If the ALARM or ALERT indicator on the power supply turns on, remove the channel module immediately.

3. If available, activate the local (equipment) loopback on the channel module itself and perform local loopbacks tests on this module (see individual channel module manuals for details).

4. Before leaving Location 1, be sure to remove the channel loopback. Make sure that no alarm or alert indicators are on.

5. At Location 2, install and wire the module adapter provided with the second channel module.

6. Install the channel module at Location 2.

Caution: If the ALARM or ALERT indicator on the power supply turns on, remove the channel module immediately.

7. If available, activate the local (equipment) loopback on the channel module itself and perform local loopback tests on this module.

8. Remove the channel loopback.

9. If desired, perform end-to-end tests or single-ended (far-end loopback) tests with the other site.

10. Ensure no alarm or alert indicators are on.

Figure 4-2 Side view of a 3RU shelf (or top view of a 1RU shelf) showing insertion of modules and module adapters

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 95: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 5

Testing and

Troubleshooting

What is in this section?5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

5.2 Recommended Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

5.3 ACS-160 Series Monitor & Control Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

5.4 Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

5.5 System Check-Out Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

5.6 Using Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

5.7 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 96: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingOverview

5-2

5.1 Overview This section describes the testing and troubleshooting procedures for the ACS-160 Series multiplexers, and provides an overview of the types of procedures used for testing payload channels. It includes an introduction to the use of the ACS-160 switches and indicators, T1 loopbacks, T1 test equipment, and channel test equipment for in-service and out-of-service testing. Specific channel test procedures for each type of channel module supplied with this system are located in the testing section of each channel module manual.

The two most common test situations are:

• Bench testing, when two (or more) multiplexers are set up side by side on a test bench before the actual field installation.

• Field testing, when the system has been installed but either is not yet in service, or has been taken out of service for maintenance or repair.

The procedures in this section are generally useful for both types of test situations. Differences between the two are noted where they occur.

While these procedures do not require the use of remote control, a laptop PC connected to the multiplexer's remote port can be helpful. Remote control can also be used to activate loopbacks in the far end multiplexer during field testing. See Section 7, Remote Control Operation on page 7-1 for details on using the remote interface.

5.2 Recommended Tools and Equipment The following is a list of the recommended equipment for testing and troubleshooting:

• basic telecommunications installation tools (screwdrivers, wire stripper, etc.)

• volt-ohm meter (VOM)

• T1 test set. Basic ACS-160 Series test procedures do not require the use of a T1 test set. However, you may need T1 test sets in some instances, such as to isolate an intermittent problem

• three-conductor cable with bantam plugs on each end for access to the T1 test jacks on the CM-5 module(s). This cable may made up by the user, or may be obtained from a commercial source

• test equipment for the payload channels (recommended equipment is listed in the testing section of each channel module manual)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 97: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingACS-160 Series Monitor & Control Features

5-3

5.3 ACS-160 Series Monitor & Control Features The front edge of the CM-5 common module contains several jacks, switches and indicators (Figure 5-1). These fall into three basic categories:

Test access: The left side of the module contains T1 input and output test jacks. These jacks are described in Section 5.6.1, T1 Test Jacks, on page 5-20.

Configuration: The center section contains four items that work together to enable the user to view and change operational parameters of the card. These are the GROUP and SET/NEXT switches, a four-character alphanumeric display for abbreviated group and function names, and a bi-level indicator (green on top, red on the bottom) that indicates whether the function shown on the display is currently active.

Status Monitoring: On the right side of the module are twelve indicators for T1 status, primary timing status, loopback activity, and CPU activity.

Four additional system status indicators are located on the power supply, and are visible when the front cover of the shelf is closed (see Figure 5-1and Figure 5-2 on page 5-4).

Table 5-1 on page 5-4 summarizes the meaning of the indicators on both the CM-5 module and the power supply. For more detailed descriptions of their functions, see Section 6.2.3, CM-5 User Interface, on page 6-10.

Figure 5-1 Front view of the CM-5 module

Note: Because CM-5 modules install vertically in 3RU multiplexers, “up” and “down” on the toggle switches actually refer to the user's right and left respectively in an ACS-163, ACS-165, or ACS-166 (Figure 5-2 on page 5-4).

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 98: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingACS-160 Series Monitor & Control Features

5-4

Figure 5-2 GROUP and SET/NEXT switches in a 3RU shelf

Table 5-1 Summary of status indicators

Indicator category (location) Label (color) Description (when lit)

T1 Status(CM-5)

TX OUT (green) Transmit output is present

RX IN (green) Receive input is present. Blinks steadily when the receive input signal is all ones, a yellow alarm, or has excess jitter. This indicator may blink erratically if there is noise on the line

ERR (yellow) Errors are detected

BPV (yellow) Bipolar violations are detected

FRM (red) T1 signal is out of frame or no signal is being received

YEL (yellow) Receiving a yellow alarm

AIS (yellow) Alarm indication signal (all ones)

Timing(CM-5)

LOOP (green) Loop timing is active (through timing on a drop & insert multiplexer)

INT (green) Internal timing is active

EXT (green) External timing is active

System status (CM-5) LPBK (yellow) Any internal loopback is active

CPU (red) The CM-5 module’s central processing unit has failed

Down Up

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 99: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-5

5.4 Diagnostic FunctionsThe ACS-160 system provides several internal functions that assist in testing and troubleshooting, as described in the following sections.

5.4.1 Using T1 Loopbacks (LPBK Group)The LPBK group activates and deactivates the three T1 loopbacks - equipment, line, or payload - provided by the CM-5 module. Generally, only one loopback is active at a time. However, the CM-5 loopbacks are independent of each other; for example, it may be useful to have the line and equipment loopbacks active at the same time.

Caution: Do not activate the Payload and Equipment Loopbacks simultaneously. This sets up a feedback condition which sends the multiplexer into an alarm state.

If the LPBK indicator on a CM-5 module is on, then one or more of its T1 loopbacks is active. Figure 5-3 illustrates the location of the three loopbacks in relation to the channel modules and T1 circuit, and Table 5-2 on page 5-6 describes their functions.

System status (power supply)

POWER (green) The multiplexer is powered

NORMAL (green) No alert or alarm is present

ALERT (yellow) An alert condition exists (see Section 5.7.4.1 on page 5-30)

ALARM (red) An alarm condition exists (see Section 5.7.4.2 on page 5-31)

Table 5-1 Summary of status indicators (continued)

Indicator category (location) Label (color) Description (when lit)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 100: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-6

Figure 5-3 T1 loopbacks

Table 5-2 LPBK group

Function Description

LnLB Line loopback. When the line loopback is active, the entire T1 signal received by this module is looped – that is, passed through to its T1 output. Line code and frame format are passed from input to output without modifi-cation. Thus, all line code (bipolar) violations, frame bit errors, and CRC-6 errors received by the CM-5 are retransmitted without correction. The line loopback forces the transmitted signal to be synchronized to the received signal. However, as Figure 5-3 on page 5-6, the line loopback is located behind the CM-5 jitter buffer so that any received jitter is attenuated. Thus, while its line loopback is active, a CM-5 is essentially loop timed

PaLB Payload loopback. When the payload loopback is active, the payload portion of the received T1 signal is looped – that is, inserted into the payload portion of the transmitted signal. However, the line code and overhead bits (frame format) of the transmitted signal are generated by the CM-5 itself. Thus line code violations, frame bit errors, and CRC-6 errors received by the CM-5 are not passed through. While the payload loopback is active, the CM-5 is automatically forced into the loop timed mode. However, once the payload loopback is deactivated, the CM-5 will return to its primary timing mode, which is the timing mode set by the user

EqLB Equipment loopback. When the equipment loopback of a CM-5 is active, the payload portion of the transmitted T1 signal is looped into the payload portion of the received T1 signal. Thus, the equipment loopback may be used to perform a local loopback test on all of the payload circuits terminated by a CM-5. While its equipment loopback is active, a CM-5 transmits an unframed all ones signal, also known as the alarm indication signal (AIS)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 101: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-7

5.4.1.1 Reviewing or Changing the State of a Loopback.To review the state of the loopbacks on a given CM-5 module:

1. Press up or down on the GROUP switch to display the LPBK group.

2. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch one or more times to display the desired loopback function. The green (top) section of the bi-level indicator next to the FUNCTION display will turn on if the displayed loopback is active while the red (bottom) section will turn on if it is not.

3. To change the state of the displayed loopback, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. The bi-level indicator will change state to indicate that the desired setup change has taken place. This is a toggle-type function; if the displayed loopback is off, pressing up twice on the SET/NEXT switch turns it on; if the displayed loopback is on, pressing up twice on the SET/NEXT switch turns it off.

If you do not want to change the state of the displayed loopback, press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display a different loopback, or press up or down on the GROUP switch to leave the LPBK group altogether.

5.4.2 The Meaning of Blinking Indicators (BLNK Group)The BLNK group contains messages that help explain what is happening when the receive input (RX IN) indicator or any of the CM-5 timing indicators are blinking (Table 5-3).

For example, if a CM-5 receiver detects an all ones signal, then its RX IN indicator blinks, and Rx11 appears in its BLNK group.

Messages appear in the BLNK group only when they are applicable; when no indicators are blinking, the BLNK group is empty.

Table 5-3 BLNK group

Message Description

Ftim Fallback timing. Ftim appears in the BLNK group when one of the timing indicators is blinking. It indicates that the CM-5 transmitter is in its fallback internal timing mode. This occurs when the CM-5 is configured to operate in the looped, through, or external timing modes, but cannot do so, generally because of a T1 facility, CM-5, or external timing source failure. The INT indicator stays on continuously while the CM-5 is in the fallback internal timing mode

NLLB Network is requesting a line loopback

NPLB Network is requesting a payload loopback

RxYI RxYI Receive Yellow Alarm. RxYl appears in the BLNK group when the CM-5 receiver detects a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI). This indicates that the far end shelf is has lost the incoming signal and is experiencing a loss of frame condition.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 102: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-8

5.4.2.1 To View the BLNK Group.If an indicator on the CM-5 is blinking, take the following steps to determine the cause(s):

1. Press up or down on the GROUP switch until the display reads BLNK.

2. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display the BLNK group contents. If there is more than one item in the BLNK group, pressing down on the SET/NEXT switch repeatedly will cycle through the messages.

3. To leave the BLNK group, press up or down on the GROUP switch.

5.4.3 Reviewing Performance Data (RVU1 Group)The functions in the RVU1 group provide status information on the phase-locked-loops, input/output timing lock, and jitter buffer (Table 5-4 on page 5-9). The items in the RVU1 group, unlike the items in the BLNK group, are always available for review. The state of each RVU1 function is indicated by the bi-level indicator located just to the right of the four-character function display on the CM-5.

Use the following procedure to view the contents of the RVU1 group:

1. Press up or down on the GROUP switch until the display reads RVU1.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through its contents.

3. To leave the RVU1 group, press up or down on the GROUP switch.

Rx11 Receive all ones. Rx11 appears in the BLNK group when the CM-5 receiver detects a framed or unframed all ones signal. This may indicate that the far end shelf is idle or set to equipment loopback. An AIS usually suggests that there is a transmission interruption at the device generating the AIS or further up the network. An unframed all ones is a T1 alarm indication signal (AIS).Rx11 also appears when the T1 carries payload that consists of nearly all ones; specifically, when there are fewer than three zeroes in two consecutive T1 frames

Tx11 Transmit AIS. Alarm indication signal—transmit unframed, all-ones signal. Also indicates that this shelf is in Line Loopback.

TxYl Transmit yellow alarm. Yellow alarm or Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) is transmitted when the shelf has lost the incoming signal and is experiencing a loss of frame condition. Transmit zeros in bit two of all time slots.

XsJt Excess jitter. XsJt appears in the BLNK group when the CM-5 T1 receiver jitter buffer has overflowed. This normally indicates that the received T1 signal contains excessive timing jitter

Table 5-3 BLNK group (continued)

Message Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 103: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-9

Table 5-4 RVU1 group

Function Description

TxLk Transmit lock. When TxLk is displayed, the bi-level on/off indicator signifies the status of the T1 transmitter PLL

For looped or external timing, if the top (green) indicator is lit, then the transmitter PLL is locked. For internal timing, this indicator should be on all the time

If the bottom (red) indicator is lit, then the transmitter PLL is not locked

RxLk Receive lock. When RxLk is displayed, the bi-level on/off indicator signifies the status of the T1 receiver PLL

If the top (green) indicator is lit, then the receiver PLL is locked

If the bottom (red) indicator is lit, then the receiver PLL is not locked

TxRx Transmit/Receive clocks. When the TxRx is displayed, the bi-level on/off indicator signifies whether or not the transmit and receive bus clocks are synchronized

If the top (green) indicator is lit, then the transmit and receive bus clocks are synchronized

If the bottom (red) indicator is lit, then the transmit and receive bus clocks are not synchronized

If the top (green) and bottom (red) indicators are toggling on and off, then the transmit and receive signals are not synchronized, but their frequencies are close.In this situation, each flash of the bottom (red) indicator corresponds to a relative phase change of one T1 unit interval (UI) or about 648ns. A relative phase change of one UI is sometimes called a "bit slip."

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 104: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-10

5.4.4 Other Diagnostic Data (DIAG Group)The DIAG (diagnostic) group displays some basic T1 common module information, and enables a reset to factory default settings (Table 5-5).

Use the following procedure to view the contents of the DIAG group:

1. Press up or down on the GROUP switch until the display reads DIAG.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch to cycle through the functions in the DIAG group.

3. To leave the DIAG group, press up or down on the GROUP switch.

XsJt Excess jitter. When XsJt is displayed, the bi-level on/off indicator signifies whether or not the receiver jitter buffer depth has been exceeded. The default buffer depth is 32 UI peak-to-peak (1 UI = 648ns, so 32 UI = 20.7µs)

If the top (green) indicator is lit, then the jitter buffer depth is exceeded (jitter >32 UI peak-to-peak, assuming a factory default buffer depth)

If the bottom (red) indicator is lit, then the jitter buffer depth is not exceeded (jitter <=32 UI peak-to-peak, assuming a factory default buffer depth)

Table 5-4 RVU1 group (continued)

Function Description

Table 5-5 DIAG group

Function Description

T1 Indicates the multiplexing mode of the module. In an ACS-160 series multiplexer, this is always T1

#.## Indicates the module’s firmware version

Fcty Factory reset. Set this function (by pushing up twice on the SET/NEXT switch while Fcty is displayed) to return the module to its factory default configuration:Framing = ESFLine Code = B8ZSTiming = Internal (terminal multiplexers), or Through (drop/insert multiplexers)Line Loopback = OFFPayload Loopback = OFFEquipment Loopback = OFFA factory reset does not affect any settings on the multiplexer other than those listed above

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 105: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-11

5.4.5 Alerts & Alarms

5.4.5.1 Conditions Causing an AlertIn the factory default setting for most applications (except STL PLUS—see Section 5.4.5.3 for details), the ACS-160 will signal an ALERT condition when one or more of the following events occurs:

• receiving yellow alarm (RX IN indicator blinking and RxYl appears in the BLNK group)

• receiving alarm indication signal (RX IN indicator blinking and Rx AIS appears in the BLNK group)

• channel module timeslot conflict

• any internal loopback active (LPBK indicator on)

• network requested loopback (LPBK indicator blinking)

• loss of primary timing (fallback timing is activated and the timing indicator corresponding to the currently selected primary timing mode will be blinking)

• single power supply failure (POWER FAIL indicator on) if using the redundant power supply option

• alarm cut-off (ACO) switch on

• alert at one or more channel modules (alert indicator lights on the card or cards in the alert state)

• excess jitter

• loss of network management communications continuity

• network management communications are out of frame

• channel card conflict

• switching to a redundant common module

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 106: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingDiagnostic Functions

5-12

5.4.5.2 Conditions Causing an AlarmIn the factory default setting for most applications (except STL PLUS—see Section 5.4.5.3 for details), the ACS-160 will signal an ALARM condition when one or more of the following events occurs:

• loss of receive signal (RX IN indicator off)

• CPU failed (CPU indicator on)

• signal present but out-of-frame (RX IN and FRM indicators on)

• no transmit output (TX OUT indicator off)

• alarm at one or more channel modules (Alarm indicator lights on the card or cards in alarm state)

Note: The ALARM indicator also lights briefly when power is first applied to the system.

5.4.5.3 Studio-Transmitter Link (STL) AlarmsThe CM-5 has a selectable set of alarm conditions specifically for STL applications. The STL alarm criteria include changes to the AIS, TXOUT, and BER alarms. You can change the CM-5 from the factory default standard alarms to the STL alarm using the advanced configuration group. For more information, see Section 3.4, CM-5 Advanced Configuration Group Menu, on page 3-11.

5.4.5.3.1 AIS and TXOUT Alarms• For STL alarms, an incoming AIS is an alarm (not an alert)

• For STL alarms, a TXOUT alarm (T1 transmitter fail) is an alert (not an alarm)

5.4.5.3.2 Bit Error Rate (BER) AlarmsFor STL alarms, the CM-5 has a fixed BER alarm threshold of 10-3 as measured over a one second interval.

5.4.5.3.3 BER Alarm Indications in ISiCLWhen the STL alarms are enabled, ISiCL can indicate a bit error alarm condition when responding to the STATUS? command:

RECEIVING 10^-3 BIT ERROR RATE

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 107: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-13

5.4.5.3.4 Enabling the STL Alarms1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch. As the display changes to read

DIAG, hold the switch down—do not release it.

2. While holding the GROUP switch down (the display must still read DIAG), press up once on the SET/NEXT switch. The display changes to read FTIM.

3. Release both switches. You are now in the advanced configuration group.

Note: Although you can cycle through the CM-5 groups by pressing repeatedly either up or down on the GROUP switch, you can only enter the advanced configuration group by pressing down on the switch to reach DIAG; that is, as the display cycles from RVU1 to DIAG.

4. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display reads CUST. Notice that CUST is underscored. This indicates an additional subgroup.

5. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch to display Std, which is the first of three CUST options.

6. Press down once on the SET/NEXT switch to display STL.

7. Press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the STL Alarms are now enabled.

5.5 System Check-Out Procedures The procedures in this section are general guides to testing a newly installed ACS-160 system prior to bringing the system on line. (If you are using a redundant CM-5, remove the inactive CM-5 for this test.) Note the following overall guidelines:

1. Start at the master timing location - that is, at the terminal multiplexer that is internally or externally timed. If both terminal multiplexers are loop timed, start at either end.

2. In a drop and insert system, check out locations in the order in which they appear in the system.

3. Test each location locally before performing system tests. Use the procedure in Section 5.5.1 on page 5-14 for terminal multiplexers and the procedure in Section 5.5.2 on page 5-17 for drop/insert multiplexers.

4. After performing the system-level tests described in this section, you may also wish to test the individual circuits formed by the channel modules in the multiplexers. Consult the individual channel module manuals for recommended test procedures for each type of circuit.

5. If these procedures do not produce the desired test results, consult Section 5.7 on page 5-26 for troubleshooting assistance.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 108: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-14

5.5.1 Testing a Terminal MultiplexerUse the following procedure to check out a terminal multiplexer (ACS-163 or ACS-167). On a dual multiplexer (ACS-166 or ACS-169), perform this procedure once on each CM-5. It is assumed that this multiplexer is already installed, wired, and powered, but is not yet in service. (If you are using a redundant CM-5, remove the inactive CM-5 for this test.)

1. Verify that the CM-5 is in the TERM mode. To do this:

Remove the active CM-5 for a few seconds, then re-insert it.

Observe that it displays TERM. If it does, go to Step 2. If it does not, then check and if necessary correct the mode switch settings on the MA-215 module adapter at the rear of the shelf (see Section 3.3, CM-5 Basic Configuration Group Menu, on page 3-2).

2. For testing purposes, the terminal should be set to use its internal timing oscillator. To set the CM-5 transmitter timing to internal:

Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TIME.

Press down on the SET/NEXT switch several times until the display shows INT.

If the top (green) portion of the bi-level indicator next to the display comes on, then timing is already set to internal. Proceed to Step 3. Otherwise, press up on the SET/NEXT switch twice to change the timing setting to internal. The green indicator should now be on.

3. Verify that T1 line code and frame format are set correctly for the T1 service available.

Note: Always use ESF framing and B8ZS line code unless your CSU or T1 service provider cannot support them.

Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TSEL.

Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired frame format (SF or ESF). If the green portion of the bi-level indicator is on, then this frame format is selected. If the green indicator is off, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to select this format.

Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display the desired line code (B8ZS or AMI). Again, if the green indicator is on, then line code is set to the displayed value. Otherwise, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to change the line code to the displayed value.

4. Disconnect the T1 input/output connector (RJ-48C) from the MA-215 at the rear of the CM-5 (or the DB-15 from the MA-216).

5. Establish a local T1 loopback in one of two ways:

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 109: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-15

Create an external loopback by connecting a Bantam-Bantam patch cord from the T1 OUT EQUIP jack to the T1 IN EQUIP jack.

Create an internal equipment loopback by using the GROUP and SET/NEXT switches to activate the EqLB function (see Section 5.4.1 on page 5-5).

6. Unseat all the channel modules in the multiplexer by pulling on their eject tabs, but do not remove them completely from the shelf. With no channel modules active, the T1 transmitter produces an all ones signal, which will be looped back to the T1 receiver. At this point, verify that the indicators respond as shown in Table 5-6 on page 5-16.

7. Press all the channel modules firmly back into their sockets. Perform one or more channel tests using available VF, data, and other type test sets. These tests may include level tests on voice channels, bit error tests on data channels, and so on (see Figure 5-9 on page 5-25).

Note: Channel tests at this stage may be performed only on 4-wire voice channels or full-duplex data channels.

8. When channel tests are complete, take down the loopback either by removing the patch cord or by de-activating the equipment loopback.

9. In a field test only - if the network configuration requires this multiplexer to use a timing source other than internal, reset the timing source now:

Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TIME.

Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired timing source (LOOP or EXT).

Press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to reset transmit timing to the source currently displayed.

10. Reconnect the T1 input/output connector (RJ-48C) to the MA-215 at the rear of the CM-5 (or DB-15 on the MA-216)

.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 110: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-16

Table 5-6 Indicators during terminal multiplexer loopback test

Indicator Patch cord loopback

EqLB loopback

CM-5

CM-5

TX OUT ON ON

RX IN BLINKSa OFFa

ERR OFF OFF

YEL OFF OFF

BPV OFF OFF

AIS OFF OFF

FRM OFF OFF

INT ON ON

LPBK OFFb ONb

CPU OFF OFF

Power supply (s)

NORMAL ON OFF

ALERT OFFb ONb

ALARM OFF OFF

a. The RX IN indicator blinks to indicate detection of an all ones signal. With an internal (EqLB) loopback active, no signal reaches the T1 receiver.

b. The LPBK and ALERT indicators only light when an internal loopback is activated, not when an external loopback is created.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 111: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-17

5.5.2 Testing a Drop/Insert MultiplexerFor a typical three-site drop/insert system (terminal at location 1, drop/insert multiplexer at location 2, and terminal at location 3), test the terminal at location 1 first, then use the following procedure to test the drop/insert multiplexer at location 2, and test the terminal at location 3 last.

In this procedure, “DI-A” refers to the CM-5 in physical slot 1, terminating the T1 line between locations 1 and 2, and “DI-B” refers to the CM-5 in slot 2, terminating the T1 line between locations 2 and 3. (If you are using a redundant CM-5, remove the inactive CM-5 for this test.)

1. Verify that the DI-A CM-5 is set to DI-A mode, and the DI-B CM-5 is set to DI-B mode. To do this:

Remove each CM-5 for a few seconds, then re-insert it.

Observe that it displays the correct mode (DI-A or DI-B). If it does, go to Step 2. If it does not, then check and if necessary correct the mode switch settings on the module adapter at the rear of the shelf. See Section 2.6, MA-215 and MA-217B Module Adapters, on page 2-7 for the specific settings for the MA-215 and MA-217B.

2. For each CM-5, verify that T1 line code and frame format are set correctly for the T1 service available.

Note: Always use ESF framing and B8ZS line code unless your CSU or T1 service provider cannot support them.

Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display shows TSEL.

Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired frame format (SF or ESF). If the green portion of the bi-level indicator is on, then this frame format is selected. If the green indicator is off, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to select this format.

Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display the desired line code (B8ZS or AMI). Again, if the green indicator is on, then line code is set to the displayed value. Otherwise, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to change the line code to the displayed value.

3. Put one end of a T1 patch cord, or a 100 ohm termination plug, into the T1 IN EQUIP jack of the DI-B CM-5. This establishes a “no signal” condition at the DI-B T1 input, which forces the DI-A CM-5 to revert automatically to fallback (internal) timing.

4. Using a second patch cord, establish a loopback of the DI-A CM-5 by connecting its T1 OUT EQUIP jack with its T1 IN EQUIP jack. (Alternatively, activate the Equipment Loopback [EqLB] on the DI-A CM-5).

5. Once the loopback is established, verify that the indicators on the DI-A CM-5 respond as shown in Table 5-7 on page 5-18.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 112: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-18

6. Perform one or more channel tests on 4-wire voice channels or full-duplex data channels that terminate via the DI-A CM-5 (if such channels are present), as described in the terminal multiplexer test procedure above.

7. When channel tests are complete, take down the loopback on the DI-A CM-5 by removing the patch cord between the T1 OUT EQUIP and T1 IN EQUIP jacks, or by de-activating its Equipment Loopback (EqLB).

8. Remove the patch cord or termination plug that was plugged into the T1 IN EQUIP jack of the DI-B CM-5.

9. Using a patch cord, loop back the DI-B CM-5 by connecting its T1 OUT EQUIP jack with its T1 IN EQUIP jack. (Alternatively, activate the Equipment Loopback [EqLB] in the DI-B CM-5). At this point, both Drop/Insert CM-5s should be timed by the signal coming from the terminal multiplexer at location 1, which has already been tested. Therefore, the fallback timing “trick” is not needed to test the DI-B CM-5.

Table 5-7 Indicators during drop & insert multiplexer loopback test for the DI-A CM-5

Indicator Patch cord loopback

EqLB loopback

CM-5

CM-5 (DI-A)

TX OUT ON ON

RX IN ON ON

ERR OFF OFF

YEL OFF OFF

BPV OFF OFF

AIS OFF OFF

FRM OFF OFF

LOOP BLINKINGa BLINKINGa

INT ON ON

LPBK OFF ON

CPU OFF OFF

Power supply (s)

NORMAL OFF OFF

ALERT ON ON

ALARM OFF OFF

a. In a drop & insert multiplexer, the LOOP indicator actually signifies the THRU timing. The indicator blinks to show that although this is the primary timing setting, the multiplexer is now using fallback (internal) timing.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 113: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingSystem Check-Out Procedures

5-19

10. Once the DI-B CM-5 is looped, verify that the indicators are responding as shown in Table 5-8.

11. With the DI-B CM-5 looped, perform all desired local loopback tests on the transmit/receive channel modules that are set up to terminate circuits coming in via the DI-B CM-5. As before, these tests may include loss measurements on voice and program channels, bit error tests on data channels, and so on.

12. Remove the loopback of the DI-B CM-5 by removing the patch cord or deactivating the Equipment Loopback.

13. At this point you may perform end-to-end tests on channels established between any two locations that have already been tested. Refer to the individual channel module sections in this binder for recommended test procedures.

Table 5-8 Indicators during drop & insert multiplexer loopback test for the DI-B CM-5

Indicator Patch cord loopback

EqLB loopback

CM-5

CM-5 (DI-A and DI-B)

TX OUT ON ON

RX IN ON ---a

ERR OFF OFF

YELLOW OFF OFF

BPV OFF OFF

AIS OFF OFF

FRM OFF OFF

LOOP ON ON

LPBK(DI-B only)

OFF ON

CPU OFF OFF

Power supply (s)

NORMAL ON OFF

ALERT OFF ON

ALARM OFF OFF

a. The RX IN indicator on the DI-A CM-5 should be lit. However, when the internal equipment loopback is active, the state of RX IN of the DI-B CM-5 will depend on the signal coming from location 3, which has not yet been tested.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 114: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingUsing Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System

5-20

5.6 Using Test Equipment With an ACS-160 SystemACS-160 system tests can be performed at the T1 circuit level with the system in service or out of service. Tests can also be performed on individual channels within the system. The following sections describe these types of testing.

5.6.1 T1 Test JacksEach CM-5 has two pairs of bantam jacks (T1 IN and T1 OUT) to provide test access to the T1 input and output signals. Each pair consists of one equipment (EQUIP) and one monitor (MON) jack (Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4 T1 test jacks

The two equipment jacks are used for out-of-service testing. When a plug is inserted into the Equipment In jack, the incoming T1 signal from the MA-215 is disconnected from the T1 receiver on the CM-5 and a signal can be injected at this point to the CM-5. Similarly, when a plug is inserted into the Network Out jack, the output of the CM-5 T1 transmitter is disconnected from the MA-215 and a signal can be injected at this point to the network.

The two monitor jacks are designed for in-service testing and are therefore equipped with isolation amplifiers. Because of these amplifiers, the T1 signals received and transmitted by the multiplexer can be monitored without affecting their levels.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 115: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingUsing Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System

5-21

5.6.2 Using T1 Test Equipment to Perform In-Service TestsWhen intermittent errors occur on one or more data channels, it is often helpful to perform in-service monitoring on the T1 facility. This is primarily useful in determining whether the channel errors are being caused by errors on the T1 facility, rather than by a fault in the channel module or in another section of the low-speed circuit.

Use the following procedure to perform in-service monitoring of a T1 facility between two ACS-160 locations (Figure 5-5). This procedure will not affect any of the channel traffic between these locations.

1. To measure performance in the location 2 to location 1 direction, connect the DS1/T1 input of a T1 test set to the T1 IN MON jack on the multiplexer at location 1.

2. To measure performance in the location 1 to location 2 direction, connect the DS1/T1 input of a T1 test set to the T1 IN MON jack on the multiplexer at location 2.

Figure 5-5 In-service monitoring of a T1 circuit

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 116: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingUsing Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System

5-22

5.6.2.1 Hints for Interpreting Test Results• on T1 systems using the ESF frame format, measure total CRC-6 errors,

CRC-6 errored seconds, and CRC-6 severely errored seconds to determine overall facility performance

• check the CSUs (if present) for bipolar violations (BPVs) and other errors. Some CSUs can be set to recalculate CRC codes, in which case an incoming CRC error will not be passed along to the multiplexer for detection there

• on systems using the SF frame format, frame bit error counts can be used to detect the presence of a high bit error rate or a severe error burst. However, frame bit error monitoring cannot usually identify problems causing very low error rates

• check with your service provider to determine what level of error performance is guaranteed on your T1 circuit. Compare this with your actual test results

5.6.3 Using T1 Test Equipment to Perform Out-of-Service TestsThis section describes the use of T1 test equipment to test T1 facilities on an out-of-service basis. The tests described in this section can only be performed when you have access to a full end-to-end T1 circuit. If you have fractional T1 service, you cannot perform these tests.

For compatibility with all carrier networks, the test equipment must be capable of generating framed T1 signals. If possible, use a QRSS (quasi-random signal source) test pattern. Consult your test set manual for setup requirements.

As illustrated in Figure 5-6 on page 5-23, out-of-service tests can be performed by plugging a test set into the CSU at location 1, and sequentially activating three different loopbacks at location 2:

• a CSU line side loopback to test the T1 facility

• a line loopback in the ACS-160 multiplexer to test the both the facility and the connections between the CSU and the multiplexer

• a payload loopback in the ACS-160 multiplexer to test the facility, the connections, and the CM-5 in the location 2 multiplexer

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 117: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingUsing Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System

5-23

Figure 5-6 Out-of-service testing of a T1 circuit

5.6.4 Using Analog or Data Test Equipment to Perform Channel TestsThis section provides general principles for testing individual payload channels. Consult the manual sections for each type of channel module for specific channel test procedures.

Test individual channels using the appropriate analog transmission measurement sets (TMS), digital bit error rate test sets (BERTS), and other related types of test equipment. You can perform tests on individual channels of in-service T1 systems without affecting the other channels carried in the same system.

Figure 5-7 on page 5-24 shows a typical end-to-end data channel test. If the data channel module at location 2 has an internal loopback capability, activate that loopback to perform the test. If it does not, then use a loopback plug connected to the module adapter for that module.

Figure 5-8 on page 5-24 illustrates an end-to-end test on a voice or program audio channel. For duplex voice channels, perform the test in each direction of the circuit.

As shown in Figure 5-9 on page 5-25, you can perform local loopback tests on individual channel modules before putting a multiplexer into service by activating its equipment loopback, or by establishing a local loopback using a T1 patch cord. Loopback tests can only be performed on full-duplex 4-wire voice and data channels.

Once a system is in-service, avoid using T1 loopbacks to test individual channels, because the entire T1 circuit will be out-of-service while the loopback is active.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 118: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingUsing Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System

5-24

Figure 5-7 Testing a data channel on an in-service T1 system

Figure 5-8 Testing a voice or audio channel on an in-service T1 system

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 119: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingUsing Test Equipment With an ACS-160 System

5-25

Figure 5-9 Testing channel modules using a local T1 loopback or anout-of-service T1 system

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 120: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-26

5.7 TroubleshootingThis section presents a general approach to troubleshooting an ACS-160 system. It includes some basic guidelines, a typical troubleshooting procedure, and an explanation of the alerts and alarms generated by the ACS-160 Series.

No procedure, however, can cover all possible situations. If you have reached what appears to be a dead end, or if the information in this section does not seem to apply to your case, please contact Intraplex customer service at (978) 486-9000 for assistance in troubleshooting your ACS-160 system.

Figure 5-10 Basic trouble categories

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 121: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-27

5.7.1 Trouble TypesACS-160 system troubles fall into three basic categories (Figure 5-10 on page 5-26):• setup errors

• T1 network problems

• ACS-160 equipment problems

The basic objective of any troubleshooting procedure is to determine the type and location of a problem. Once this is accomplished, taking one of the following actions will usually restore the ACS-160 system:

• for setup problems, re-configure the multiplexer or multiplexers that are not set up correctly

• for public network problems, work with your Local or Inter-Exchange carrier to correct the situation. For private network problems, consult the network manager

• for equipment problems, replace the bad module or modules with spares

5.7.2 Troubleshooting GuidelinesKeep the following guidelines in mind when troubleshooting an ACS-160 system.

1. In general, always check for setup errors before performing in-service or out-of-service tests. Setup problems may not appear immediately. For example, if at installation time both multiplexers in a point-to-point system are incorrectly set to use AMI instead of B8ZS line coding, errors may not occur until later when a data pattern with insufficient ones density is transmitted.

2. If a trouble occurs on a single channel, always check to see if similar troubles exist on other channels. If troubles exist on multiple channels at the same time, then the source of the channel troubles is probably a T1 circuit or CM-5 failure, rather than several simultaneous channel module failures.

3. To isolate a “soft” trouble such as a low bit error rate on a data channel, or occasional clicks or pops on audio channels, try in-service T1 circuit monitoring (Section 5.6.2 on page 5-21) before performing out-of-service testing. This can minimize overall circuit down-time.

4. To isolate “hard” trouble, for example when troubleshooting a system that is unavailable because of a high error rate or loss of frame synchronization, use a loopback procedure (Section 5.4.1 on page 5-5) or perform an out-of-service test (Section 5.6.3 on page 5-22). Once a system is in hard failure, you incur no additional down time by using these techniques.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 122: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-28

5.7.3 Typical Troubleshooting ProcedureThe following procedure describes the typical sequence of steps involved in troubleshooting an ACS-160 system.

1. At each location, verify that the POWER indicator on the main power supply is on. If there is an expansion shelf in the location and it has its own power supply, verify that its POWER indicator is on as well. If the POWER indicator is off, then there is a power-related problem. Check the power source and power connections.

If you suspect an internal problem on a power supply, check the voltages on the supply using the procedure described in Section 5, Testing the Power Supply below.

2. Check that the CPU indicator on the CM-5 is off. If this indicator is lit, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) on the CM-5 is bad. Replace the CM-5 module.

3. Remove and reinsert the CM-5 module (on a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer, do this once for each CM-5). When reinserted, the alphanumeric display will show the CM-5 mode (TERM, DI-A, or DI-B) for several seconds.

If nothing appears on the display, replace the CM-5 module. If the wrong mode appears, correct the switch settings on the MA-215 (or MA-217B) associated with the CM-5 (see Section 2.6, MA-215 and MA-217B Module Adapters, on page 2-7 for setting the MA-215/MA-217B).

4. Check that the TX OUT indicator on the CM-5 is on. If this indicator is not lit, there is no transmit activity on the CM-5, and the module must be replaced.

5. Check that the multiplexer is “in frame”; that is, it has T1 frame synchronization. When a multiplexer is in frame, the CM-5 FRM indicator is off.

If the FRM indicator is lit and the RX IN indicator is off, there is no receive activity:

Check the DTE (data terminal equipment) to which the multiplexer is connected (CSU or modem) and make sure it is set up and operating correctly.

Check the cabling between the multiplexer and the DTE. See Section 2.7, Connecting T1 Circuit(s), on page 2-9 for the correct wiring.

Check the equipment (multiplexer and DTE device) at the other end of the T1 circuit.

Call your T1 carrier to verify that the T1 circuit is operating.

If there is still no receive activity, the CM-5 may be bad. Replace it with a spare.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 123: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-29

6. If both the FRM indicator and the RX IN indicator are lit, there is receive activity but no frame synchronization:

Call your T1 carrier to find out what kind of frame format is in use on the T1 circuit. Make sure that this format is set correctly on the multiplexers (and the CSUs, if present) at both ends of the T1 circuit.

If the frame format is set correctly but the system is still out of frame, the CM-5 may be bad. Replace it with a spare.

7. Verify the LPBK indicator is not lit; all the loopbacks should be off.

8. If the RX IN indicator is blinking, set the alphanumeric display to the BLNK group to determine the cause:

If the display reads RxYl, the multiplexer is receiving a yellow alarm. Contact your T1 carrier to resolve the problem.

If the display reads Rx11, the multiplexer is receiving an all ones signal, meaning that there are no active channels in the system. Check the channel modules at each end of the circuit.

This display may also indicate that all the active channels in the system are sending data that is almost all ones.

If the display reads XsJt, there is severe jitter on the T1 circuit. Contact your T1 carrier to resolve the problem.

9. If the ERR and/or the BPV indicators are flashing, there are errors on the T1 circuit:

Call your T1 carrier to determine whether the circuit is set up to use B8ZS or AMI line coding.

Make sure that this format is set correctly on the multiplexers (and the CSUs, if present) at both ends of the T1 circuit.

Check that the T1 connecting cables at each end of the circuit are properly shielded and are no more than 150 feet long.

5.7.3.1 Testing the Power Supply If the power supply does not appear to be functioning, remove it and check the fuse on the supply. If the fuse is bad, replace it with an identical type and reinsert the module.

If the fuse is good, use a VOM to test for correct voltages at the test points shown on Figure 5-11 on page 5-30.

Caution: Point E9 is close to the edge of the card, especially on a 1RU shelf - be careful not to let the test probe touch the chassis while testing this point.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 124: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-30

Test point E12 is ground. The correct voltages are:

E9 to E12, +5.3 VDC (�0.1 VDC)E10 to E12, +15.0 VDC (�0.75 VDC)E11 to E12, -15.0 VDC (�0.75 VDC)

If the voltages are correct but the indicators on the power supply do not light, the fault probably lies either with the internal connection to the motherboard, or with the blocking diode that allows two power supplies to work together.

Figure 5-11 Front view, PS-50 and PS-100 power supplies

5.7.4 Alerts and AlarmsIf an alert or alarm condition is present, the multiplexer will turn off the NORMAL indicator, turn on the ALERT or ALARM indicator, and activate the alert or alarm relays, as appropriate.

On an ACS-166 dual terminal multiplexer, the multiplexer will register an alert or alarm if either of the terminals has an alert or alarm condition, even if the other terminal is operating normally. An alert or alarm condition on one terminal will not affect the operation of the other terminal.

5.7.4.1 Conditions Causing an Alert An ALERT condition is defined as one or more of the following:

• receiving yellow alarm (RX IN indicator blinking, and RxYl appears in the BLNK group)

• receiving an AIS alarm (AIS indicator on)

• any internal loopback active (LPBK indicator lit)

• loss of primary timing (fallback timing is activated, and the timing indicator corresponding to the currently selected primary timing mode will be blinking)

• single power supply failure (POWER FAIL indicator lit)

• alarm cut-off (ACO) switch on

• alert at one or more channel modules (alert indication indicator lights on the card or cards in alert state)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 125: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-31

5.7.4.2 Conditions Causing an AlarmAn ALARM condition is defined as one or more of the following:

• CPU failed (CPU indicator lit)

• loss of receive signal

• signal present but out-of-frame (RX IN and FRM indicators lit)

• no transmit output (TX OUT indicator off)

• alarm at one or more channel modules (alarm indication lights on the card or card is in alarm state)

• the ALARM indicator also lights briefly when power is first applied to the system

5.7.4.3 Alarm Cut-Off (ACO) Switch The Alarm Cut-Off (ACO) switch is located near the front of each power supply module, as shown in Figure 5-11 on page 5-30.

When the ACO switch is off, the alarm and alert relays respond to alarm and alert conditions. However, when the ACO switch is on, these relays are disabled; that is, they are forced into their normal (non-alarm) positions.

The ACO switch on an ACS-160 Series multiplexer may be used to silence a local alarm once this multiplexer has been identified as the source of the alarm. After correcting the condition that produced the alarm or alert, be sure to return the ACO switch to its off position.

There is no power supply redundancy capability in a 1RU shelf. When an Intraplex 3RU multiplexer is equipped with a redundant power supply, the relays on both the main and redundant power supplies will respond to alarm and alert conditions. This ensures that alarm/alert monitoring continues even while one or the other supply is removed. Because the corresponding relay contacts on the main and redundant supplies are connected in parallel, the ACO switches on both must be on to activate the alarm cut-off.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 126: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Testing and TroubleshootingTroubleshooting

5-32

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 127: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 6

Functional Description

What is in this section?6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

6.2 Component Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

6.3 System Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 128: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionOverview

6-2

6.1 OverviewThis section explains the functions of the ACS-160 Series multiplexer components, and describes how to use the multiplexers to configure both point-to-point and drop/insert T1 systems.

6.2 Component Functionality

6.2.1 The Main Equipment Shelf and the MotherboardAll modules, module adapters, and power supplies plug into the main equipment shelf. These components communicate with each other via the shelf backplane or motherboard, which contains both signal and power distribution buses (Figure 6-1 on page 6-3).

Power enters at either the AC or battery connectors and passes to the power supply. The power supply provides three voltages to the power distribution bus (+5 VDC, +15 VDC, and -15 VDC), from which each common and channel module draws current as needed. Power supplies from the signaling battery and ring generator, if used, also connect to the power distribution bus.

6.2.1.1 Drop and Insert Operation: The Role of the Signal Bus The signal bus actually comprises four buses: TX A bus, RX A bus, TX B bus, and RX B bus.

In a terminal multiplexer, the channel modules place their transmit signals on the TX A bus. The CM-5 takes these signals and multiplexes them together for transmission on the T1 line. It also takes the incoming T1 signal, demultiplexes it, and places the resulting channel signals on the RX-B bus, from which the channel modules take their individual receive data (Figure 6-2 on page 6-4).

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 129: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-3

Figure 6-1 Internal connections on the motherboard

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 130: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-4

Figure 6-2 Signal bus in a terminal multiplexer

Each channel module has a bus selection switch that sets its transmit and receive directions. This switch is generally labeled TX-A BUS or TERM. Setting the TX-A BUS or TERM switch on ensures that the module will transmit on the TX-A bus and receive from the RX-B bus, as required in a terminal multiplexer.

In a drop/insert multiplexer, setting the TX-A BUS or TERM switch on sets a channel module set to transmit and receive via the CM-5 designated as DI-A. Setting the TX-A BUS or TERM switch off (up) sets a channel module to transmit and receive via the CM-5 designated as DI-B, using the TX-B bus and the RX-A bus (Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3 Signal bus in a drop & insert multiplexer

On some older channel module designs, there are two switches, one for the transmit side and one for the receive side. These two switches should always be set to opposite directions. In a terminal multiplexer or to communicate via the DI-A port in a drop/insert multiplexer, set the switches to transmit A, receive B. To communicate via the DI-B port in a drop/insert multiplexer, set the switches to transmit B, receive A. Consult the individual channel module manuals to determine the location and labeling of these switches on the modules provided with this system.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 131: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-5

As Figure 6-3 on page 6-4 shows, in a drop/insert multiplexer the RX-A bus connects to the TX-A bus, and the RX-B bus connects to the TX-B bus. When there are no active channel modules in a drop/insert multiplexer, all time slots of the T1 signal coming from each direction transfer to the outgoing T1 signal in the other direction. When any transmit-only or full duplex channel modules are installed and active, their output overrides the data coming through on their selected time slot(s). Data in time slots not in use by any local channel module passes through as before.

A receive-only channel module may be used to monitor a channel passing through without affecting its passage.

6.2.2 CM-5 Common Modules CM-5 common modules are the core building blocks of ACS-160 Series multiplexers. Each provides one full-duplex T1 port. A terminal multiplexer contains one CM-5, while a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer contains two.

The CM-5 provides eight basic operational functions, described in detail in the following sections. These are:

• multiplexing of channels to form the T1 aggregate

• T1 line driver (output)

• transmit timing functions

• T1 line receiver (input)

• demultiplexing of the T1 aggregate to individual channels

• loopback configurations

• microprocessor control

• user interface

Figure 6-4 on page 6-6 shows a functional diagram of the CM-5 module.

6.2.2.1 Multiplexing of Channels to Form the T1 AggregateThe CM-5 develops backplane bus synchronization signals. The transmit section of each channel module synchronizes to these signals, and places its data onto the selected bus. The CM-5 then forms the aggregate signal, using either the ESF (extended superframe) or SF (D4 superframe) framing format. ESF is the preferred format, and should be used in all cases except when the network or CSU cannot support it. Section 6.3.1.1, T1 Frame Formats, on page 6-20 provides more details on these two framing formats.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 132: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-6

Figure 6-4 CM-5 common module T1 functional diagram

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 133: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-7

The CM-5 uses tri-state bus drivers and receivers to permit routing the multiplexer and demultiplexer bus signals to either of the two backplane buses (Bus A or Bus B). This versatile bus capability enables simple configuration of a multiplexer for terminal or drop and insert use (see Section 6.2.1.1, Drop and Insert Operation: The Role of the Signal Bus, on page 6-2).

6.2.2.2 T1 Line Driver Line coding can be set to either B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution) or AMI (alternate mark inversion). B8ZS is the preferred format, and should always be used unless the network or channel service unit cannot support it. A description of these line coding methods appears in Section 6.3.1.2, T1 Line Coding, on page 6-22.

Equipment and monitor test jacks on the front of the module accept input of miniature bantam plugs. They allow the T1 output of the multiplexer to be connected to a T1 transmission test set, or to be fed directly into the input of another multiplexer during bench testing.

The T1 line output connection is via the MA-215 module adapter. Inserting a plug into the T1 equipment out jack breaks the outgoing connection to the MA-215. Terminating impedance should be 100 ohms balanced. The T1 monitor out jack permits test access to the line output without breaking the T1 line connection. Equipment connected to this jack should also provide a 100 ohm termination impedance. The signal level at this point is approximately 20 dB below the line output level.

6.2.2.3 Transmit Timing FunctionsIn a terminal multiplexer, the CM-5 enables the selection of a primary timing source: loop, internal, or external. In a drop/insert multiplexer, primary timing is always set to through. In the event of network or link problems causing a loss of primary timing, an automatic, carefully controlled changeover to fallback timing helps eliminate frame slips and maintain circuit availability. The fallback timing source is factory-preset to internal.

For more information on selecting the primary transmit timing source, see Section 3.5, T1 Transmitter Timing (TIME Group), on page 3-16.

6.2.2.4 T1 Line Receiver T1 input should be at the standard DS-1 digital cross connect level (DSX-1). T1 format can be either ESF (extended superframe) or SF (D4 superframe). Line code can be either B8ZS (bipolar with 8-zero substitution) or AMI (alternate mark inversion).

The line receiver accepts the input signal, recovers receive timing, and decodes the bipolar signal. A jitter buffer follows, to smooth out the timing jitter usually present on an incoming signal.

The CM-5 receives T1 line input via the MA-215 (or MA-216) module adapter. Equipment and monitor T1 in jacks function like the T1 out jacks described

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 134: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-8

above. All equipment connected to them should provide 100 ohms termination. The equipment in jack breaks the connection to the T1 line input; the monitor in jack does not, but the signal level at the monitor jack is about 20 dB below the input level.

6.2.2.5 Demultiplexing of the T1 Aggregate to Individual ChannelsThe decoded line receive signal feeds the demultiplexer circuitry.

First, the demultiplexing circuitry achieves frame synchronization, using a proprietary robust framing algorithm that assures fast frame acquisition and high tolerance to errors once a frame is acquired. Average frame time for the SF (superframe) format is 4 milliseconds, and for the ESF (extended superframe) format is less than 18 milliseconds. Mean time to lose frame in the presence of a high (10-3) random bit error rate exceeds several hours (Figure 6-5).

Once frame synchronization is achieved, the demultiplexer develops the proper demultiplexing bus signals and feeds them to all the channel cards plugged into the shelf. Bus signals include demultiplexed channel data, demultiplexing synchronization status, and synchronization signals necessary for proper decoding by the channel modules.

Figure 6-5 Mean time to lose T1 frame synchronization

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 135: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-9

6.2.2.6 Loopback ConfigurationsThe CM-5 provides three loopback options: line, payload, and equipment, as shown on Figure 6-4 on page 6-6.

Line loopback is useful for testing the integrity of the transmission path and the T1 connections to the multiplexer. It takes the decoded T1 receive signal coming from the line receiver/jitter buffer, and loops it back to the T1 line driver input. Receive data also passes on to the demultiplexer.

Payload loopback is useful for verifying the operation of the CM-5 up to the bus interface to the channel modules. Data also passes on to the receive side of the channel modules.

Equipment loopback is useful for testing individual channel modules in the multiplexer. It loops the transmit signals at the multiplexer output back to the demultiplexer input. During equipment loopback, the T1 output of the CM-5 is an all ones signal.

Examples of loopback use appear in Section 5.7, Troubleshooting, on page 5-26.

6.2.2.7 Microprocessor Control and Battery-Backed Memory The microprocessor chip used on all Intraplex common modules contains a lithium battery, which is an inextricable element of the microprocessor and is not independently replaceable.

The lithium battery powers the memory on the chip, and thus retains setup information whenever operating power is removed. This may occur when equipment is stored or in transit, when the module containing the chip is removed from a powered shelf, or during unintentional or catastrophic loss of operating power.

In the design of Intraplex equipment, failure of the battery while the equipment is under operating power does not affect proper operation. Battery failure will not become evident until power is removed and the equipment is subsequently repowered. Upon repowering, the alphanumeric display on the common module will flash "ERR 0" or will remain blank.

The lithium battery used on the microprocessor chip has a data retention time of at least 10 years and an expected shelf life of at least 20 years. In this context, "data retention time" is the time when power is removed (the battery is active), and "shelf life" is the time when the shelf is powered (the battery is inactive).

Intraplex's maintenance philosophy provides for repair of equipment by the replacement of inoperative plug-in modules. A failed lithium battery will cause the failure of the common module on which it is mounted (although, as stated above, this failure will not actually occur until operating power is removed and restored). To restore the multiplexer to service, replace the failed module with a spare common module, and return the failed unit to the factory for replacement of the microprocessor.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 136: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-10

6.2.3 CM-5 User InterfaceThe CM-5 has two switches, a four-character alphanumeric display, and several indicators on its front edge to enable user settings and display status information (Figure 6-6 on page 6-10).

Figure 6-6 Front view of the CM-5 module

6.2.3.1 The GROUP and SET/NEXT Switches and the Alphanumeric DisplayThe user-accessible CM-5 functions are organized into groups. These function groups include setup options such as SF and ESF (frame formats); current status conditions such as receiving all ones; and informational items such as the CM-5 firmware revision.

Detailed explanations of the basic CM-5 functions appear in the following sections:

• T1 operational functions (TIME and TSEL) appear in Section 3, Multiplexer Setup

• diagnostic functions (LPBK, BLNK, RVU1, and DIAG) appear in Section 5, Testing and Troubleshooting

• remote access setup functions (ADDR and SIO) appear in Section 7, Remote Control Operation

Use the GROUP switch to select a particular function group, and the SET/NEXT switch to view and set functions within the currently selected group. The four-character alphanumeric display shows both group and function names, and the bi-level ON/OFF indicators signify the status of the currently displayed function.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 137: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-11

6.2.3.2 Displaying CM-5 FunctionsWhen the CM-5 display is blank or when a function is displayed, press down on the group toggle switch to view the name of the currently selected group. Once the current group name is displayed, press down on the group switch again to select the next group or press up to select the previous group, until the desired group is displayed.

Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display the first function in the currently selected group. Once a function appears, press down on the SET/NEXT switch repeatedly until the desired function is displayed.

The bi-level indicator to the right of the function display indicates the status of the currently displayed function. If the top (green) part of the bi-level indicator is lit, then this function is active. If the bottom (red) part of the bi-level indicator is on, the function is not active.

6.2.3.3 Setting CM-5 FunctionsTo turn on a function that is not currently active, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch while that function is on the display. Pressing up once causes the top (green) indicator to blink, indicating that a setup change will take place if the SET/NEXT switch is pressed up again. Actually pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch a second time causes the top (green) bi-level indicator to turn on continuously, indicating that the selected setup parameter has been changed to the currently displayed setting. If a function is already active, then pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch again causes no status or setup changes.

For example, if the display shows ESF while frame format is set to SF, then the red indicator will be on. Pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch once will cause the top (green) indicator to blink. Pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch a second time will actually change the current T1 framing format from SF to ESF—the red indicator goes out, and the green indicator stays on steadily.

It is important to note that some setup functions are mutually exclusive; setting one function will automatically "un-set" another. Examples include line code (you can set line code to AMI or B8ZS but not both) and frame format (you can set frame format to SF or ESF but not both). Other functions are not mutually exclusive. For example, CM-5 Line (LnLB) and Equipment (EqLB) loopbacks in the LPBK group may be activated at the same time.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 138: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-12

6.2.3.4 Indicators on the CM-5 ModuleTable 6-1 details the meanings of the indicators on the CM-5.

Note: For all the indicators that follow, ON means the light is on steadily; BLINK means a rhythmic, one-half second on, one-half second off pulse; and FLASH means momentary, irregular flashes.

Table 6-1 Indicators on the CM-5

Indicator Description

TX OUT(green)

Transmit output

ON When lit, the transmission signal is normal. It can a data signal, or if idle, an all ones signal

OFF No signal is being transmitted. This indicates a hardware failure

RX IN(green)

Receive input

ON A data signal is detected at the CM-5 T1 receiver input

OFF No signal is detected at the receiver input

BLINKING One of the following signals or conditions listed below are detected (seen on the BLNK group display):

Rx11 - A framed or unframed all ones signal is detected, produced by an idle condition at the far end (an unframed all ones is a T1 alarm indication signal (AIS))

RxYL - A yellow alarm, indicating a loss of the receive signal at the far end (if the equipment at the far end is set up to generate a yellow alarm)a

XsJt - Excess jitter. Indicates that the jitter buffer depth has been exceeded. This indicator may flicker erratically if there is noise on the line

ERR(yellow)

Errors

FLASH This indicator flashes each time a CRC-6 error is detected

YEL(yellow)

Yellow alarm

ON Indicates an "upstream" failure. Loss of signal detected from an upstream source.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 139: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-13

BPV(yellow)

Bipolar violations

FLASH The indicator flashes each time a bipolar violation is detected

ON Stays lit when the random bit error ratio exceeds 10-5

AIS(yellow)

Alarm Indication Signal

ON Indicates an upstream failure has been detected.

FRM(red)

Out of frame

ON Indicates that the CM-5 T1 receiver is not in frame synchronization. This may be caused by a high bit error ratio, the absence of a T1 receive signal, or by improper configuration of the CM-5 module

LOOP(green)

Loop or through timing

On an ACS-163 terminal multiplexer:

ON Indicates the T1 transmitter is loop timed

BLINKING Indicates that loop is selected for primary timing, but the module is currently using fallback timing

On an ACS-165 drop & insert multiplexer:

ON Indicates that the T1 transmitter is through timed

BLINKING Indicates that through is selected for primary timing, but the module is currently using fallback timing

INT(green)

Internal timing

ON Indicates that the CM-5 transmitter is using its internal 1.544 MHz clock

EXT(green)

External timing

ON Indicates that the CM-5 transmitter is using timing provided by an external clock

BLINKING Indicates that external is selected for primary timing, but that the module is currently using fallback timing

LPBK(yellow)

Loopback

ON Indicates that one or more of the three internal CM-5 loopbacks (line, equipment, or payload) is active

Table 6-1 Indicators on the CM-5 (continued)

Indicator Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 140: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-14

6.2.4 Power Supply ModulesThe standard power supply for the ACS-160 Series are 60-watt universal AC. Supplies for 3RU shelves are also available with input voltages of -48 VDC, -24 VDC, and +24 VDC. Also, optional 100-watt universal AC supplies are available for the 3RU shelves for applications with high power requirements.

See Section 8.10, Power, on page 8-5 for details on all available power supplies.

A second, identical power supply may be inserted in the second power supply slot for power supply redundancy. If the main supply fails, the second supply ensures uninterrupted operation. The redundant power supply is optional and is not available for 1RU shelves.

Power supply modules require no special setup. As long as they are plugged into their slots and system power is applied, they are operating.

CPU(red)

Central processing unit of the CM-5

ON Indicates that a microprocessor or memory fault has been detected on the CM-5. CPU failure is reported as an alarm to the shelf alarm circuitry. This indicator is briefly lit at power-up

a. An ACS-160 series multiplexer does not generate a yellow alarm upon the loss of a receive signal.

Table 6-1 Indicators on the CM-5 (continued)

Indicator Description

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 141: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-15

6.2.4.1 Test Points, Indicators and Switches on the Power SupplyAs shown in Figure 6-7, the key system status indicators and the Alert and Alarm relays are located on the power supply module. These status indicators and relays respond to fault conditions detected in the multiplexer, the T1 circuit, or channel modules installed in the shelf. Table 6-2 on page 6-16 lists the meanings of these indicators.

6.2.4.1.1 System Status IndicatorsFour of these indicators (POWER, NORMAL, ALERT and ALARM) are visible when the front cover of the multiplexer is closed (see Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 on page 1-5). The SUPPLY FAIL indicator(s) are not visible when the cover is closed.

Figure 6-7 PS-50 and PS-100 series power supplies

6.2.4.1.2 Supply Fail IndicatorsAs Table 6-2 indicates, when a shelf is equipped with two power supplies, the failure of one supply creates an ALERT condition. On a 3RU shelf, both supplies are visible from the front, and the SUPPLY FAIL indicator lights on the one that has failed. On a 1RU shelf, the redundant supply is out of sight in the rear, so the main supply has two indicators, MAIN SUPPLY FAIL and REDUNDANT SUPPLY FAIL, to indicate which one needs to be replaced.

The power supply also contains the ACO (Alarm Cut-Off) switch. The ACO switch disables the Alert and Alarm relays, and is used to silence a local alarm. On a 3RU shelf, if two power supplies are installed, then both ACO switches must be turned on to silence an alarm. Turning on the ACO switch is one of the conditions that causes the Alert indicator to light. It has no effect on the Alarm indicator.

Test points on the power supply (E9, E10, E11, and E12) allow testing for proper voltages. The procedure for using these test points is given in Section 5.7.3.1, Testing the Power Supply, on page 5-29.

Figure 6-8 on page 6-17 contains a simplified functional diagram of the power supply.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 142: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-16

Table 6-2 Power supply indicators (when lit)

Indicator Description

POWER(green)

Indicates the multiplexer is powered. Remains on if one of two installed power supplies has failed and the remaining supply has sufficient capacity to power the multiplexer

NORMAL(green)

Indicates that no alert or alarm condition exists

ALERT(yellow)

When the ACO switch is on, indicates there is an alert at one or more channel modules. The CM-5 indicators below can assist in determining the alert condition:RX IN is not lit - loss of receive signalRX IN is blinking - receiving a yellow alarmLPBK is lit - internal loopback activeLOOP, INT, EXT is blinking - the fallback timing is activated, and the primary timing mode that is used will be blinkingSUPPLY FAIL is lit - (only when two power supplies are installed) indicates a power supply failure When the ACO switch is on, there is an alert at one or more channel modules

ALARM(red)

When the ACO switch is on, indicates there is an alert at one or more channel modules. This indicator lights briefly at power-up. The CM-5 indicators below can assist in determining the alert condition:CPU is lit - the central processor unit failedRX IN and FRM are lit - the signal is present but is out of frameTX OUT is lit - there is no transmit output

SUPPLY FAIL(red)

Only on a PS-50 or PS-100 series power supply. Indicates failure of the power supply (the shelf is running on the supply whose SUPPLY FAIL indicator is not lit)

MAIN SUPPLY FAIL(red)

Only on a PS-25 series power supply. Indicates failure of the main power supply (the shelf is running on the redundant supply in the rear power supply slot)

REDUND SUPPLY FAIL(red)

Only on a PS-25 series power supply. Indicates failure of the redundant power supply (the shelf is running on the main power supply)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 143: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-17

Figure 6-8 Power supply module functional diagram

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 144: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionComponent Functionality

6-18

6.2.5 Channel Modules All payload circuits connect to ACS-160 Series multiplexers via plug-in channel modules. Intraplex produces a variety of channel modules to support voice, data, and program audio applications.

The transmit side of each channel module converts its input into one or more 64 kbps time slots and places this information onto the transmit bus on the backplane for multiplexing by the CM-5 (see Section 6.2.2, CM-5 Common Modules, on page 6-5).

Similarly, the receive side of each channel module takes the incoming demultiplexed digital information from its designated time slot(s) on the receive bus on the backplane and converts it back to its original format for output.

Section 4, Channel Module Overview provides general information about using and configuring channel modules. The individual channel module manuals contain detailed information on each type of channel module provided with this system.

6.2.6 Module Adapters All common and channel modules use plug-in module adapters to provide the connectors for the individual and aggregate channel interfaces. In most cases, one module adapter is required for each module on a one-to-one basis; however, certain module adapters provide connections for more than one module. Power supply modules require no module adapters.

All module adapters have the same connector on their front edge to mate with the shelf backplane, but different types of module adapters have different rear edge connectors, providing a variety of interfaces (Figure 6-9 on page 6-19).

For some channel modules there is one specific module adapter that must be used to provide the correct connector(s). Other channel modules are compatible with several different MAs, each providing a different interface. Each individual channel module manual describes the module adapter(s) available for that module.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 145: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-19

Figure 6-9 Side view of a 3RU shelf (or top view of a 1RU shelf), showing the insertion of modules and module adapters

6.3 System Functionality

6.3.1 T1 Digital TransmissionA single T1 circuit provides twenty-four full-duplex, 64 kbps time slots to carry payload data, for an aggregate payload capacity of 1.536 Mbps in each direction (24 x 64 = 1536). An 8 kbps overhead channel brings the actual T1 interface rate to 1.544 Mbps (see Section 6.3.1.1 below).

Intraplex ACS-160 Series multiplexers provide an interface between T1 circuits and one or more payload channels, which originate and terminate at plug-in channel modules. Channel modules convert voice, program audio, and data signals into a single or multiple 64 kbps digital signals. These 64 kbps signals are then combined by time division multiplexing into a 1.544 Mbps T1 signal.

The T1 circuit is inherently duplex; that is, there are twenty-four time slots in each direction of the circuit, as characterized in Figure 6-10. Thus, while a two-way voice or data channel may occupy time slot 6 in both directions, if a one-way audio signal is using time slots 7 and 8 in one direction, those two time slots are still available to carry a different one-way signal in the other direction.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 146: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-20

Figure 6-10 Representation of the duplex nature of a T1 circuit

6.3.1.1 T1 Frame FormatsThe T1 signal is composed of 8,000 frames per second. Each frame consists of one 8-bit byte from each of the 24 time slots, plus one overhead bit, used to provide frame synchronization, error detection, and other functions.

Frames are arranged into larger groupings in one of two formats: either superframe (SF), which groups 12 frames together (Figure 6-11 on page 6-21), or extended superframe (ESF), which groups 24 frames together (Figure 6-12 on page 6-21). Whether a particular T1 line operates with SF or ESF framing depends on the T1 service provider.

The ESF format provides better error detection than SF and should be used whenever possible; however, it is not supported by some older networks and channel service units (CSUs). ACS-160 Series multiplexers can be set to operate using either SF or ESF frame format.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 147: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-21

Figure 6-11 Superframe (SF) format

Figure 6-12 Extended superframe (ESF) format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 148: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-22

6.3.1.2 T1 Line CodingTo assist in detecting transmission errors, all T1 lines use one of two forms of line coding: either AMI or B8ZS.

AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) is a simple bipolar coding scheme. Each "one" bit in the data stream is given an opposite polarity from the one before it, while every "zero" bit is neutral (Figure 6-13). If two ones in a row have the same polarity, this is by definition a bipolar violation and indicates a transmission error; the BPV indicator on the CM-5 flashes whenever a bipolar violation is detected.

AMI is an older system with a significant limitation: when the payload being transmitted contains too many zeroes in a row (a condition called insufficient ones density), the T1 circuit may lose frame synchronization.

B8ZS is the preferred form of line coding and should be used instead of AMI whenever possible. However, some older networks do not support it.

Figure 6-13 AMI line coding

To help prevent insufficient ones density on AMI networks, many Intraplex channel modules offer methods of preventing long strings of zeroes from occurring. These methods include:

1. Placing the payload data into alternate time slots (any unused time slots are automatically filled with all ones).

2. Using only 56 kbps instead of 64 kbps per time slot and filling every eighth bit with a one.

3. Incorporating a data scrambler that applies its own form of zero substitution to the data for that channel.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 149: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-23

B8ZS (Bipolar With 8-Zero Substitution) is a newer and more robust form of bipolar line coding that eliminates the problem of insufficient ones density. With B8ZS, any time a string of eight consecutive zeroes appears in the payload (Figure 6-14), it is replaced by a zero substitution code (a special sequence of ones and zeroes) before transmission (Figure 6-14). At the receive end, this sequence is converted back to eight zeroes to maintain data integrity. Intentional bipolar violations are applied to signal the presence of a zero substitution code; whenever a bipolar violation is detected on a B8ZS circuit, the multiplexer checks the surrounding bit sequence to determine whether it is part of a zero substitution code or a true transmission error.

Figure 6-14 Original payload containing eight consecutive zeroes

Figure 6-15 B8ZS zero substitution line coding Intentional Bipolar Violations

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 150: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-24

6.3.2 Terminal Multiplexers

6.3.2.1 Single Terminals (ACS-163, ACS-167)The ACS-163 and ACS-167 terminal multiplexers serve as an interface between a single T1 circuit and multiple voice, program, data, and other types of payload circuits (Figure 6-16).

Figure 6-16 Terminal multiplexer configuration

The ACS-163 is a 3RU (5¼" high) shelf that accommodates up to sixteen channel modules, while the ACS-167 is a 1RU (1¾" high) shelf that accommodates up to three channel modules. The functionality of these two multiplexers is otherwise identical.

6.3.2.2 Dual Terminal Multiplexer (ACS-166, ACS-169)The ACS-166 dual terminal multiplexer is a 3RU (5¼" high) shelf that provides two separate T1 terminals in one chassis (Figure 6-17 on page 6-25). Each T1 circuit is supported by one CM-5, and each has eight slots available for channel modules. The ACS-169 is a 1RU (1¾" high) shelf that accommodates up to three channel modules. The functionality of these two multiplexers is otherwise identical.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 151: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-25

Figure 6-17 Dual terminal multiplexer

The two terminals are completely independent of each other in terms of data channels; there is no drop/insert functionality, and no time slots pass between the two. However, they share the same power supply and alarm system; an alert or alarm condition on either of the two terminals will cause the shelf to display ALERT or ALARM.

6.3.3 Point-to-Point Systems The simplest type of ACS-160 system configuration is a point-to-point system, two terminal multiplexers connected by a single T1 circuit (Figure 6-18 on page 6-26). As the figure illustrates, the same payload circuits appear at both ends of a point-to-point system.

Most payload types, such as voice and full-duplex data circuits, have both an input and an output at each terminal multiplexer. However, some payload types, like simplex data and one-way program audio channels, have an input at one multiplexer and an output at the other, with no return signal.

Keep in mind that the T1 circuit itself is always full duplex (see Section 6.3.1, T1 Digital Transmission, on page 6-19). With Intraplex multiplexers, any time slots used by a one-way channel are still available to carry an independent one-way channel in the other direction.

For example, if program audio is being transmitted on time slots 1 to 4 from location 1 to location 2, another audio program may be transmitted simultaneously on time slots 1 to 4 from location 2 to location 1.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 152: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-26

Figure 6-18 Example point-to-point system

6.3.4 Drop/Insert Multiplexers (ACS-165 and ACS-168)An ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexer is essentially a pair of back-to-back ACS-163 terminal multiplexers in which some circuits terminate while others pass through (Figure 6-19 on page 6-27). Note that a drop/insert multiplexer can terminate payload circuits from either of two different T1 circuits; that is, from either of two different locations.

The ACS-165 is a 3RU (5¼" high) shelf that accommodates up to sixteen channel modules, while the ACS-168 is a 1RU (1¾" high) shelf that accommodates up to four channel modules. The functionality of these two multiplexers is otherwise identical.

See Section 6.2.1.1, Drop and Insert Operation: The Role of the Signal Bus, on page 6-2 for more details on the internal workings of a drop/insert multiplexer.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 153: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-27

Figure 6-19 Drop & insert multiplexer configuration

6.3.5 Drop/Insert SystemsThe addition of one or more drop/insert multiplexers converts a simple point-to-point system into a drop/insert system (Figure 6-20 on page 6-28). Data, voice, program audio, and distribution (multiple drop) circuits can be established between any two locations in a T1 drop/insert system.

As illustrated in the figure, a three-location system can provide circuits between locations 1 and 2, 2 and 3, as well as 1 and 3. The only limiting factor is the 24 time slot capacity of the T1 circuit between any two adjacent locations. Drop/insert systems are not limited to a single drop/insert multiplexer and may in fact be used to link as many as one hundred locations.

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 154: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Functional DescriptionSystem Functionality

6-28

Figure 6-20 Example of an ACS-165 drop & insert system

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 155: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Section 7

Remote Control OperationWhat is in this section?7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

7.2 The Remote Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

7.3 ISiCL Command Line Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

7.4 General Format of ISiCL Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

7.5 Shelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

7.6 Channel Module Remote Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29

7.7 CSU Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40

7.8 Configuring the CM-5TD Delay Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49

7.9 Network Management Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55

7.10 IntraGuide Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63

Page 156: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationOverview

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-2

7.1 OverviewAn ACS-160 Series multiplexer can be set up and monitored from a controller connected to its RS-232 remote port. The controller, which may be a simple video display terminal, a personal computer (PC), or another type of computer system, can be connected locally using a cable or remotely using dial-up modems over a data network. The terminal or computer used for remote control must contain a basic communications program which provides call setup and terminal emulation functions.

ACS-160 Series multiplexers operate strictly in the command-response mode. That is, a multiplexer generates a message only in response to a received command.

The Intraplex Simple Command Language (ISiCL, pronounced "icicle") provides the basis for communication between the user and the multiplexer. The operator types ISiCL commands at the keyboard and views the responses on the terminal screen. The design of the ISiCL command structure also allows ACS-160 Series multiplexers to be integrated into a multi-node, multi-vendor network controlled by an automated Network Management System (NMS).

7.2 The Remote PortEach CM-5 has one remote port. A terminal multiplexer therefore has one remote port while a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer has two remote ports.

Remote ports are RS-232C compatible, asynchronous, serial interfaces which can operate at baud rates from 110 bps to 57.6 kbps.

7.2.1 Hardware and Protocol IssuesThe remote port for each CM-5 is located on its associated module adapter. Both the MA-215 and MA-217B module adapters have an RJ-11 jack for the remote port. The pin assignments for this connector appears in Section 2.7.4, Wiring the Remote Port (Optional), on page 2-13.

7.2.1.1 Establishing the Control Circuit An ACS-160 Series remote control circuit can be established in one of four ways:

1. Connect a video display terminal or PC directly to the remote port on an ACS-160 Series multiplexer (Figure 7-1 on page 7-3) using an RS-232 cable. Although not actually “remote,” this method allows you to use ISiCL rather than the internal switches on the multiplexer for control and configuration.

2. Using modems, establish a remote connection over a dial-up voice circuit (Figure 7-2 on page 7-4).

3. Use asynchronous data modules in the multiplexers to establish a link over the T1 circuit itself (Figure 7-3 on page 7-4).

Page 157: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-3

Caution: When the control circuit is carried as a channel on the T1 circuit, do not command the far end multiplexer to initiate an equipment loopback or you will not be able to turn the loopback off by remote control.

4. For multi-site systems, ACS-160 Series multiplexers can be connected to a controller over a public switched network (Figure 7-4 on page 7-5). This can be a DDS, X.25, or any type of data network capable of providing asynchronous RS-232 interfaces for the ACS-160 remote ports. ISiCL commands issued over switched network circuits may include the network address of the “target” multiplexer to facilitate record keeping and network management.

7.2.1.2 Remote Connection to a Dual Terminal or Drop/Insert Multi-plexer.Connections to the two CM-5s in a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer must be made separately. This means that establishing control circuits over the public telephone network will require either a pair of modems at each end of the circuit, terminating two separate voice lines, or a code-operated switch at the far end to select which CM-5 receives each command.

Figure 7-1 Direct connection to a multiplexer

Note: Connection to multiple CM-5s can also be accomplished by daisy-chaining the output of a common module to the input of another common module, using special Intraplex cables and adapters.

Page 158: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-4

Figure 7-2 Remote connection over a dial-up circuit

Figure 7-3 Remote connection over the T1 circuit

Page 159: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-5

Figure 7-4 Remote connection over a public switched network

7.2.1.3 HandshakingCurrent ACS-160 software does not support hardware or software flow control or "handshaking." This is not an issue when entering ISiCL commands manually from a terminal or PC keyboard. However, if you plan to download ACS-160 setup information, or poll ACS-160 multiplexers for status information using a PC or any other type of automated controller, be aware that flow control must be handled by the controller itself. Generally, this means that controller software must be programmed to wait until it has received a response to the last command sent to a given multiplexer before issuing another command to the same multiplexer.

7.2.2 Configuring the Remote Port

7.2.2.1 Setting the Network Address (ADDR Group)

Note: The following sections contain procedures that include use of the GROUP and SET/NEXT switches. If you are not already familiar with using these switches, please review Section 1.6, CM-5 User Interface, on page 1-10 before proceeding.

Each CM-5 can be assigned a four-digit address; that is, a number from 0001 to 9999. Network addresses are used to distinguish the multiplexers connected via a common network to a central controller. The central controller can be a human operator using a PC or dumb terminal with a basic communications program, or, when available, a computerized network management system which is compatible with the ACS-160 Series.

Page 160: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-6

In such a network, all ACS-160 Series multiplexers may receive every command issued by the central controller. However, including the target multiplexer's network address in the command format ensures that only the target multiplexer will respond to that command.

The network address is an optional setting. If the remote access feature is not in use, or if a terminal is connected directly to a single CM-5, it is not necessary to set up and use the network address.

The network address is useful when two or more multiplexers are connected to a central controller. It provides a means of identifying which multiplexer (or more specifically, which CM-5) was addressed when reviewing the records of such commands.

The two CM-5s in an ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexer may have the same or different addresses. However, we recommend that both CM-5s in any given ACS-165 multiplexer be assigned the same network address. This practice will be assumed throughout this document. Commands can still be targeted to one CM-5 or the other in a drop/insert multiplexer by including the appropriate subaddress, either DI-A or DI-B (subaddresses are covered in Section 7.3, ISiCL Command Line Format, on page 7-12).

The two CM-5s in an ACS-166 dual terminal multiplexer should generally be given different addresses, as they may need to be addressed separately.

To prevent unauthorized or accidental changes, multiplexer addresses cannot be changed remotely. Rather, each multiplexer's address must be entered locally, usually at the time of installation.

To view and, if desired, change the current network address of an ACS-160 Series multiplexer (illustrated in Table 7-1):

1. Press up or down on the GROUP switch one or more times until the display shows ADDR.

2. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch one time. The function display shows the current four-digit address of the multiplexer, for example 0001. Also, the green (top) section of the bi-level indicator next to the function display turns on to indicate that the displayed address is the current address.

3. If you do not want to change the current address, either do nothing, or press down on the GROUP switch to exit the ADDR group and perform some other setup operation.

If you do want to change the current address, press down on the SET/NEXT switch a second time to begin the address editing process. The display changes to show all four digits smaller, with one digit underscored. For example, if the current multiplexer address is 0001, then the display now shows 0001.

Page 161: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-7

4. At this point, each press down on the SET/NEXT switch causes the underscore to move one digit to the right, and each press up on the SET/NEXT switch increments the currently underscored digit by one. Using this process, change any or all digits to obtain the desired address. Address 0000 is reserved; choose any number from 0001 to 9999.

Once the display is edited to the desired value:

5. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch until the underscore disappears and the digits are again displayed full size. For example, if the displayed address was changed to 0040, the display now reads 0040. The red (bottom) indicator lights to signify that the display is not the current address.

6. To change the multiplexer's network address to the number on the display, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch.

Note: Pressing up once on the SET/NEXT switch causes the green (top) indicator to blink; this indicates that a change is about to be made. At this point you can abort the change by pressing down on the SET/NEXT switch. Pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch a second time actually makes the change. The green (top) indicator now stays on and the red indicator turns off, indicating that the displayed number is the currently set address.

Table 7-1 Changing a multiplexer network address from 0001 to 0040

Step ActionFunction Display

On/Off Indicator

1Press up or down on the GROUP switch one or more times to reach the ADDR group ADDR

2Press down on the SET/NEXT switch once to display the current address. The green (top) indicator lights to signify that the number on the display is the currently set address

0001

3Press down again on the SET/NEXT switch to begin address editing 0001

4Press down twice more on the SET/NEXT switch to move the underscore to the third digit 0001

5Press up three times on the SET/NEXT switch to change the third digit from 0 to 4 0041

6Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to move the underscore to the last digit 0041

7Press up nine times on the SET/NEXT switch to change the last digit from 1 to 0 0040

Page 162: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-8

7.2.2.2 Setting Remote Port Parameters (SIO Group) The ACS-160 Series remote port is an RS-232 compatible serial interface. The Serial Input/Output (SIO) group functions are summarized in Table 7-2. The group contains settings for three parameters:

• remote port baud rate (110, 300, 1200, 2400 4800, 9600, 19,200, or 57,600 bps)

• parity mode (mark, space, even, or odd)

• remote access lock (locked or unlocked). This can be used to unlock the remote port locally if the remote access password is lost

Note: The remote port always operates using seven data bits, one parity bit, and one stop bit. These parameters cannot be changed by the user.

7.2.2.2.1 Selecting the SIO GroupTo select the SIO group, press up or down on the GROUP switch one or more times until SIO appears in the display. At this point each press down on the SET/NEXT switch will display the next SIO function. The three functions in the SIO group are:

• BAUD

• PAR

• Lock

8Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to restore the full size display. The red indicator (bottom) lights to signify that this number is not the current address

0040

9Press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to change the current address to match the display. After the second press, the green (top) indicator will light and the red (bottom) indicator turns off, signifying that the display shows the current address

0040

Table 7-1 Changing a multiplexer network address from 0001 to 0040 (continued)

Step ActionFunction Display

On/Off Indicator

Page 163: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-9

Note that BAUD and PAR are both underscored. This indicates that there is an additional menu layer beneath them that contains more functions. BAUD and PAR may be thought of as subgroups within the SIO function group. The Lock function, on the other hand, is not underscored, indicating that it is a standard function and therefore does not have an additional menu layer beneath it.

Table 7-2 SIO group

Function Setting Description

BAUD(baud rate)

110300

120024004800960019,257,6

110 bps300 bps1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps9600 bps19.2 kbps57.6 kbps

exit When exit is displayed, press up on the SET/NEXT switch to exit the BAUD subgroup and display the PAR function

PAR(parity)

Spac Space. No parity: all parity bits set to zero

Mark Mark. No parity: all parity bits set to one

Even Even parity. Each parity bit is set so that the total number of ones in each data byte, including the parity bit, is even

Odd Odd parity. Each parity bit is set so that the total number of ones in each data byte, including the parity bit, is odd

exit When exit is displayed, press up on the SET/NEXT switch to exit the PAR subgroup and display the Lock function

Lock When the Lock function is displayed, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch to toggle the state of the remote port between locked and unlocked. The green (top) indicator lights when the port is locked; the red (bottom) indicator lights when the port is unlocked To exit the Lock function and display the BAUD subgroup, press down on the SET/NEXT switch. To exit the SIO group, press up and down on the GROUP switch

Page 164: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-10

7.2.2.2.2 Setting Baud Rate To display and change the current remote port baud rate:

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until SIO appears.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display reads BAUD.

3. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch. The display now reads 110 which is the first available baud rate, 110 bits per second (bps).

4. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch additional times to see the other available baud rates: 300, 1200, 2400, and so on. Note that the green (top) bi-level indicator turns on when the display shows the currently set baud rate, and the red (bottom) indicator turns on when the display shows any other baud rate.

5. To change the current baud rate, press down on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the desired baud rate, and then press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the current baud rate now equals the displayed baud rate.

The last function in the BAUD subgroup is exit. When the exit function is displayed, you can press up on the SET/NEXT switch to leave the BAUD subgroup and display PAR, the next SIO function. To exit the SIO group altogether, press up or down on the GROUP switch.

7.2.2.2.3 Selecting Parity ModeTo display and change the current parity mode:

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until SIO appears.

2. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch to display PAR.

3. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch. The display now shows Spac, which is the first of four available parity modes.

4. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch additional times to see the other available modes: mark, even, and odd. If parity mode is set to Space, then every parity bit is set to zero. If parity mode is set to Mark, then every parity bit is set to one. If parity mode is set to Odd or Even then parity bits will be set to create odd or even parity for each data byte. The green (top) bi-level indicator turns on when the display is the same as the current setting, and the red (bottom) indicator turns on when the display is not the same as the current setting.

5. To change the current parity setting, advance the display to the desired setting and press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) bi-level indicator blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the display matches the current setting.

Page 165: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationThe Remote Port

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-11

The fifth function in the PAR subgroup is exit. When the exit function is displayed, you can press up on the SET/NEXT switch to leave the PAR subgroup and display Lock, the next SIO function. To exit the SIO group altogether, press up or down on the GROUP switch.

7.2.2.2.4 Using the Lock FunctionThe Lock function locks and unlocks the remote port. When the remote port is locked, setup changes cannot be made remotely. This prevents accidental or unauthorized system setup changes through the remote port.

To unlock a multiplexer via the remote port, the user must send the proper command and password. During setup, the user selects a password, which can be any collection of letters and numbers up to 16 characters in length. Section 7.5.1, Using the LOCK and UNLOCK Commands, on page 7-20 describes the use of locking and passwords.

The lock function has no effect on local operation; a multiplexer can be unlocked locally (using the GROUP and SET/NEXT toggle switches) even if its password has been lost.

To access the Lock function directly:

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until SIO appears.

2. Press down on the SET/NEXT switch until Lock is displayed. (As mentioned above, the Lock function can also be accessed from the PAR subgroup by displaying its exit function and pressing up on the SET/NEXT switch.)

3. When the display shows Lock, the green (top) bi-level indicator turns on if the multiplexer remote port is locked, and the red (bottom) indicator turns on if it is unlocked. To toggle the state of the remote port from locked to unlocked or unlocked to locked, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch.

4. To exit the Lock function and display the BAUD subgroup, press down on the SET/NEXT switch. To exit the SIO group entirely, press up or down on the GROUP switch.

Page 166: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationISiCL Command Line Format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-12

7.3 ISiCL Command Line FormatThe general ISiCL command format consists of four fields (address, subaddress, command, and parameter), each separated by a colon, and ending with a semicolon. This is followed by an optional comment field, and a carriage return (a press of the ENTER key on a standard keyboard):

<ADDRESS>:<SUBADDRESS>:<COMMAND>:<PARAME-TER=VALUE>; (COMMENT, IF DESIRED) <CR>

Filling in the comment field is always optional, and the other four fields may sometimes be left blank, as explained below. However, the three colons, the semicolon, and the carriage return must be present for the command to be recognized.

For example, to set primary timing to EXTERNAL in a terminal multiplexer whose network address is 3, type:

Then press the ENTER key on your terminal or PC keyboard.

In the example above, "3" is the target multiplexer's address; "TERM" is the subaddress (also referred to as the card address); "SET" is the command; "PTIME" is the parameter being set; and "EXT" is the desired parameter value. Note that colons (:) terminate the address, subaddress, and command fields while a semicolon (;) terminates the parameter field, the last field in an ISiCL command line.

In the sample ISiCL commands shown in the following sections, the carriage return character required at the end of every ISiCL command line will not be shown explicitly. However, remember that in all cases, ISiCL commands must end with a carriage return character (hex 0D). When typing commands manually, simply press the ENTER key at the end of every command line.

7.3.1 Address FieldThe first field in an ISiCL command line is the address field, which contains the multiplexer’s network address. Valid ISiCL network addresses are the integers from 1 to 9999. Leading zeros are not required; an address of "0005" can be entered simply as "5." 0 is not a valid ISiCL address and should not be used. The procedure for setting the multiplexer’s network address is given inSection 7.2.2.1, Setting the Network Address (ADDR Group), on page 7-5.

The network address is used to route a command to a specific multiplexer when commands are broadcast to several multiplexers at once. If the address field in an ISiCL command contains a number, only the multiplexer which is set to that address will respond. If the address field is left blank, any multiplexer will respond to an otherwise valid command.

3:TERM:SET:PTIME=EXT;

Page 167: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationISiCL Command Line Format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-13

In a system involving a single remote control link, the address field is generally left blank. For example, if you are entering ISiCL commands from a modem-equipped PC that is connected over a dial-up voice circuit to a single modem-equipped terminal multiplexer, then the SET command discussed above could be entered as follows:

Note that the colon terminating the address field is required, even when the address field itself is left blank.

7.3.2 Subaddress Field The second field in an ISiCL command line is the card address, or subaddress field. This field is used to identify specific common and channel modules within a given ACS-160 Series multiplexer. Valid ACS-160 Series multiplexer subaddresses are shown in Table 7-3 on page 7-14.

In a drop/insert multiplexer, only the DI-A module will accept and process commands targeted for channel modules - that is, commands with a subaddress of the form Cn, where n is a number from 1 to 36. Therefore, when using either a local controller or a remote controller to perform channel module operations on a drop/insert multiplexer, always establish the connection through the remote port on the DI-A module. In the case where both CM-5s of a drop/insert multiplexer are connected to a controller via a data network, commands issued with the proper multiplexer address and channel module subaddress will automatically be processed by the multiplexer's DI-A module and ignored by its DI-B module.

In an ACS-166 dual terminal multiplexer, each of the two CM-5s accept and process commands for it’s associated channel module. Each CM-5 must be given a different network address if the multiplexer is connected to a data network controller.

7.3.2.1 Default SubaddressIf the subaddress field is left blank, the default subaddress is TERM. This is a convenience feature for addressing the CM-5 module in a terminal multiplexer. The default can not be used with a drop/insert multiplexer.

When using the default, the colon terminating the subaddress field must still be present. For example, the following command uses the default subaddress to send a configuration inquiry to a terminal multiplexer:

:TERM:SET:PTIME=EXT;

::CONFIG?:;

Page 168: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationISiCL Command Line Format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-14

Table 7-3 Subaddress field entries

Subaddress Description

TERM Use this subaddress in commands issued to the CM-5 in a terminal multiplexerIn an ACS-166 dual terminal multiplexer, both CM-5s have the subaddress TERM. Use the multiplexer address to differentiate between them if they are both connected to the same network controller

DI-A Use this subaddress in commands issued to the CM-5 configured to operate in the DI-A mode in drop/insert multiplexers

DI-B Use this subaddress in commands issued to the CM-5 configured to operate in the DI-B mode in drop/insert multiplexers

Cn(n = 1, 2,...36)

Use this subaddress format in commands sent to remotely controllable channel modules. Note that n is the subaddress number or "card address" of the target channel module within the multiplexer. This should not be confused with the multiplexer’s network address. Channel module card addresses are set using switches on the channel modules themselves. The card address is generally set to the same number as the physical slot the card occupies, or, in an expansion shelf, to that number plus 18. This is not a requirement, but following this convention makes for easier maintenance. Each channel module within a given multiplexer must, of course, be assigned a different number. Valid channel module numbers are the integers from 1 to 36.Consult the individual channel module sections in this binder for details on setting the card address.

Page 169: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationISiCL Command Line Format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-15

7.3.3 Command FieldThe third field in the ISiCL command line is the command field. There are five ISiCL commands: SET, CONFIG?, STATUS?, LOCK, and UNLOCK.

The first three commands - SET, CONFIG?, and STATUS? - can be addressed either to common modules or to channel modules. When issued to a common module, these commands must include an appropriate subaddress - TERM, DI-A, or DI-B. When issued to channel modules, they must include a subaddress of the form Cn, where n = 1 to 36.

The last two commands - UNLOCK and LOCK - refer to the remote port itself, and therefore can be issued only to common modules.

If the command field is left blank, the default command is STATUS?. This is a convenience feature, providing a quick method for checking the status of a multiplexer, particularly a terminal multiplexer. The colon terminating the field, however, must always be present.

As noted earlier, if the address field is left blank, any multiplexer will respond, and if the subaddress field is left blank, its default is TERM. Combining these with the default for the command field means that a STATUS? command can be issued to a terminal multiplexer simply by typing three colons and a semicolon:

Table 7-4 summarizes the five ISiCL commands.

:::;

Table 7-4 Command field entries

Command Description

SET Used to set a particular parameter on the common or channel module identified in the subaddress field. Every SET command must include a valid parameter name and value in the parameter fieldExample: 1:TERM:SET:CODE=B8ZS;

CONFIG? Lists the configuration settings for the module named in the subaddress field. The parameter field in a CONFIG? command should be left blank Example: 9999:DI-A:CONFIG?:;

Page 170: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationISiCL Command Line Format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-16

STATUS? When addressed to a channel module, lists the state of all "S" (status) parameters associated with that moduleExample: 1234:C5:STATUS?:;When addressed to a CM-5, lists the T1 interface and timing status information associated with that module. Also provides notification if one or more channel modules are in an alert or alarm stateExample: 1234:TERM:STATUS?:;In all cases, the STATUS? command's parameter field should be left blank

WHO The ISiCL “WHO” command will provide the information for network (shelf) addresses, configuration (TERM, DI-A or DI-B) and the local shelf cards. The response to the WHO ISiCL command appears as follows:

*OKCM-5 CONFIGURED AS A TERMCHANNEL CARD <n1>, TYPE <id1>CHANNEL CARD <n2>, TYPE <id2>CHANNEL CARD <n3>, TYPE <id3>

Where n = card address and id = card type identifier

UNLOCK Unlocks the remote port of the addressed CM-5. This command must be accompanied by a valid password in the parameter field. However, because every CM-5 is given a null password at the factory, the parameter field of UNLOCK commands issued to a new CM-5 must be left blank (null) until its password is set. See Section 7.5.1.1, Changing the Password, on page 7-21Examples (null password): 5555:TERM:UNLOCK:;(password GREEN): 5555:TERM:UNLOCK:GREEN;

LOCK Locks the remote port of the addressed CM-5. When a CM-5’s remote port is locked, it will not allow setup changes; that is, it will not accept SET commands. Note that if the password is lost, a module's remote port can still be unlocked locally. The parameter field of a LOCK com-mand should be left blankExample: 4:DI-B:LOCK:;

Table 7-4 Command field entries (continued)

Command Description

Page 171: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationISiCL Command Line Format

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-17

7.3.4 Parameter FieldThe fourth field in an ISiCL command line is the parameter field. As noted above, the parameter field should be left blank for STATUS?, CONFIG?, and LOCK commands.

For UNLOCK commands, the parameter field must contain the correct password of the addressed multiplexer. For example, to unlock the remote port on the DI-A module in an ACS-165 multiplexer with an address of 12 and a password of "GREEN," issue the command:

For SET commands, the parameter field must include a valid parameter name, followed by an equal sign (=), followed by a valid parameter value. For example, to activate the payload loopback in a terminal multiplexer with an address of 17, issue the command:

The valid parameter names and values for SET commands issued to CM-5s are listed below in Section 7.5.4, Changing Common Module Setup Parameters, on page 7-27.

SET commands can also be issued to remotely controllable channel modules. Each channel module type has its own valid parameter names and values, listed in Appendix A of the individual channel module manuals.

7.3.5 Comment Field The ISiCL command line format also allows a free-form comment to be included after the command, between the semicolon and the carriage return. For example:

Anything typed in the comment field (that is, anything after the semicolon but before the carriage return) is ignored by the multiplexer. Comments may be used when ISiCL commands are embedded in batch files or data files accessed by an automated controller, to make the commands more readable later. The comment field is optional at all times.

7.3.6 Allowable CharactersISiCL command line fields may contain valid addresses, subaddresses, commands, parameters and spaces.

12:DI-A:UNLOCK:GREEN;

17:TERM:SET:PAYLD-LB=ON;

3:TERM:SET:PTIME=EXT; SETS MUX #3 PRIMARY TIMING TO EXTERNAL

Page 172: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationGeneral Format of ISiCL Responses

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-18

Spaces are ignored, so they can be used to make command lines more readable. For example, the following three ISiCL commands are perceived as identical by the multiplexer:

Line feed <LF> characters are also ignored. A terminal or PC may be configured to generate either a single carriage return <CR> character or a <CR><LF> pair when its Enter (or Return) key is pressed.

The input buffer for ISiCL commands has a maximum capacity of 99 characters, including spaces and line feeds. If 100 or more characters are entered before the carriage return is sent, those beyond the 99th will be ignored.

The comment field may contain any printable ASCII characters.

ISiCL commands are not case sensitive. Subaddresses, commands, and parameters may be entered in upper or lower case, or a combination of both.

7.4 General Format of ISiCL ResponsesUpon receiving a valid command, an ACS-160 Series multiplexer, or to be precise the addressed CM-5, always responds initially with the line:

This line indicates only that a valid command was received, and not necessarily that the multiplexer itself is "OK."

If the received command is SET, UNLOCK, or LOCK, which do not require explicit responses, then no additional response lines are generated. However, if the received command is CONFIG? or STATUS?, then the "* OK" line is followed by one or more lines containing the requested information. Examples of STATUS? and CONFIG? responses are provided in Table 7-7 on page 7-30 and Table 7-8 on page 7-31 respectively.

If the received command is invalid (if, for example, it contains an unrecognizable command or an invalid subaddress, or the user attempts to send a SET command while the remote port is locked), then the addressed multiplexer responds with one of three response formats:

or

3:TERM:SET:PTIME=EXT;

3:TERM:SET:PTIME = EXT;

3: TERM: SET: PTIME = EXT;

* OK

* WHAT?;

* WHAT? <descriptive message>;

Page 173: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationGeneral Format of ISiCL Responses

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-19

or

In all cases, the last line of an ISiCL response, and only the last line, terminates with a semicolon (;). All responses are immediately followed by a carriage return and line feed <CR><LF>.

* WHAT? <descriptive message>(rest of descriptive message);

Page 174: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-20

7.5 Shelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

7.5.1 Using the LOCK and UNLOCK CommandsEach CM-5 can be remotely locked or unlocked using the LOCK/UNLOCK command pair. When a CM-5 is locked, then no setup changes can be made via the module's remote port. The LOCK feature prevents accidental or unauthorized remote setup changes to ACS-160 Series multiplexers that are permanently connected to dial-up phone lines or dedicated data lines.

The LOCK feature has no effect on local operation; setup changes, including locking and unlocking the remote port, can always be done locally.

The LOCK command has the following format:

Note that the parameter field is left blank.

The UNLOCK command has a slightly different format in that its parameter field must include the password of the addressed multiplexer:

For example, assume that an ACS-165 multiplexer has been set up with an address of 8 and a password of "BLUE." To unlock the remote port on its DI-A module, make setup changes, and then relock this module, you would issue the following command sequence:

(Then include one or more SET commands).

<ADDRESS>:<SUBADDRESS>:LOCK:;

<ADDRESS>:<SUBADDRESS>:UNLOCK:<PASSWORD>;

8:DI-A:UNLOCK:BLUE;

8:DI-A:LOCK:;

Page 175: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-21

7.5.1.1 Changing the Password In addition to its address, each multiplexer may be assigned a password. The password of a multiplexer must be known in order to make any remote setup changes once its remote port(s) have been locked. All of the multiplexers in a given network may be assigned the same password or different passwords, depending on the user's requirements.

Valid passwords consist of any string of letters and numbers up to 16 characters long.

Like the network address setting, the password is actually a CM-5 parameter rather than a multiplexer parameter. The password is normally used on a one-per-multiplexer basis; that is, both CM-5s in a given ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexer may be assigned the same password. However, this is not a requirement.

When shipped from the factory, each ACS-160 Series multiplexer has a "null" password, which means that the parameter field of an UNLOCK command must be left blank to unlock the remote port. To change the password of a given CM-5, issue a SET command in the format:

Here, "xyz" is the new password. For example, to set the password of a CM-5 to "GREEN" in an ACS-163 terminal multiplexer with an address of 7, issue the command:

Or, to set the password of both CM-5s to "BLUE" in an ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexer with an address of 8, issue two commands (one to each remote port):

If the password is lost or forgotten, the multiplexer can still be unlocked locally using the Lock function in the SIO Group.

<Address>:<Subaddress>:SET:PASSWORD=xyz;

7:TERM:SET:PASSWORD=GREEN;

8:DI-A:SET:PASSWORD=BLUE;

8:DI-B:SET:PASSWORD=BLUE;

Page 176: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-22

7.5.2 Determining the Alert/Alarm Status of a MultiplexerYou can determine the overall alarm and alert status of an ACS-160 Series multiplexer by issuing a STATUS? command to its TERM or DI-A module. For example, to determine the overall status of an ACS-163 terminal multiplexer, issue a command of the form:

The response to this command shows the status of the multiplexer's T1 interface and indicates whether any channel modules are in an alarm or alert state. Similarly, to determine the overall status of an ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexer, issue a command of the form:

The response to this command shows the status of the A-direction T1 interface - that is, the T1 interface on the DI-A module - and indicates whether any channel modules are in an alarm or alert state.

To determine the status of the T1 interface on the DI-B module in an ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexer, issue a command of the form:

The response to this command shows the status of the B-direction T1 interface and indicates whether there is an alert or alarm condition in the shelf. However, since only the DI-A module in a drop/insert multiplexer relays ISiCL commands to and from the channel modules in the shelf, the response to a DI-B STATUS? command does not indicate which channel modules, if any, are generating an alarm.

If an ACS-160 Series multiplexer is not in an alarm or alert state, then it responds as follows to a STATUS? command issued to its TERM or DI-A module:

This response indicates that no power, timing, or T1 alarms or alerts are detected, the ACO switch is not on, and that no channel module on either the main or expansion shelf (if provided) is in an alarm or alert state. This "SHELF NORMAL" response may also include the line "RECEIVING ALL ONES" if the far end multiplexer is idle.

<ADDRESS>:TERM:STATUS?:;

<ADDRESS>:DI-A:STATUS?:;

<ADDRESS>:DI-B:STATUS?:;

* OK SHELF NORMAL;

Page 177: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-23

If, however, the queried multiplexer is in an alarm or alert state, then it generates a response with the following format:

Note that the "* OK" in the first line of the response indicates that the received command was valid, not that the multiplexer is "all right."

For example, if a STATUS? command is issued to a CM-5 that is receiving a T1 Yellow Alarm signal, it responds:

Or, if a STATUS? command is issued to the TERM or DI-A module in an ACS-160 Series multiplexer in which the channel module with subaddress 5 is in an alarm state, then it responds:

If more than one channel module is in an alert or alarm state, the message gives the total number of cards having problems, rather than their individual subaddresses; for example, “ALARM AT 3 CHANNEL CARDS.” Each type of channel module has its own set of conditions that cause it to enter an alarm (or alert) state. See Section 7.6, Channel Module Remote Access, on page 7-29 for more information.

In an ACS-166 dual terminal multiplexer, if an alert or alarm condition occurs on either terminal, the shelf will go into its corresponding alarm state. It is therefore possible for the shelf to register an alarm while one of the two terminals in it is still operating normally.

Table 7-5 on page 7-24 defines all the alert and alarm messages that can appear in the CM-5 response to a STATUS? command.

* OK > > > ALARM (OR ALERT) AT SHELF < < < (MESSAGE DESCRIBING THE ALARM OR ALERT CONDI-TION[S]);

* OK > > > ALERT AT SHELF < < < RECEIVING YELLOW ALARM;

* OK > > > ALERT AT SHELF < < < ALARM AT C05;

Page 178: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-24

Table 7-5 Alert and alarm messages responding to a STATUS? command

REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY FAILUREOne of the two power supplies on the main shelf or (if so equipped) one of the two power supplies on the expansion shelf has failed

ALARM AT CNN

The channel module with card address nn (nn = 01 to 36) is in an alarm state. This message appears when there is an alarm at one (and only one) channel cardReported by a TERM or DI-A module only

ALARM AT N CHANNEL CARDS

There are n channel cards in an alarm state. This message appears when there are at least two channel cards in an alarm state. Issue STATUS? commands to specific channel cards to determine exactly which cards are in trouble (see Section 7.6.1, Determining the Status of a Channel Module)Reported by a TERM or DI-A module only

ALERT AT CNN

The channel module with card address nn (nn = 01 to 36) is in an alert state. This message appears when there is an alert at one (and only one) channel card.Reported by a TERM or DI-A module only.

ALERT AT N CHANNEL CARDS

There are n channel cards in an alert state. This message appears when there are at least two channel cards in an alert state. Issue STATUS? commands to specific channel cards to determine exactly which cards are in trouble (see Section 7.6.1, Determining the Status of a Channel Module)Reported by a TERM or DI-A module only

TRANSMITTER USING FTIME = INT (FALLBACK TIMING)

The T1 transmitter is using its fallback (internal) timing mode

TRANSMITTER CLOCK FREE RUNNING

The T1 transmitter has dropped out of its primary timing mode but for some reason cannot operate in its fallback timing mode

NO OUTPUT FROM TRANSMITTER

The T1 transmitter is not generating an output signal

RECEIVE SIGNAL LOSS

No signal is detected at the T1 input

EXCESS JITTER

Excess jitter is detected at the T1 input

Page 179: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-25

RECEIVER OUT OF FRAME

The T1 receiver has lost frame synchronization

OTHER SIDE (DI-B) IS OUT OF FRAME

The T1 receiver in the DI-B module has lost frame synchronizationReported by a DI-A module only

OTHER SIDE (DI-A) IS OUT OF FRAME

The T1 receiver in the DI-A module has lost frame synchronizationReported by a DI-B module only

RECEIVING ALL ONES

A framed or unframed all ones signal is detected at the T1 input

RECEIVING YELLOW ALARM

A Yellow Alarm signal is detected at the T1 input

PAYLD-LB = ON (PAYLOAD LOOPBACK ON)(USING LOOP TIMING FOR PAYLOAD LOOPBACK)

The Payload Loopback is active

LINE-LB = ON (LINE LOOPBACK ON)

The T1 Line Loopback is active

EQPT-LB = ON (EQUIPMENT LOOPBACK ON)

The T1 Equipment Loopback is active

CONFLICT AT TIMESLOT nThere are two or more channel modules assigned to time slot n. The time slots are 1-24.

RECEIVING 10^-3 BIT ERROR RATEThere is a bit error rate alarm. See Studio-Transmitter Link (STL) PLUS Alarms in this supplement for more information on bit error alarms.

RECEIVING REMOTE ALARMThere is an alarm condition at the remote end of the network.

NETWORK PAYLD-LB = ON (PAYLOAD LOOPBACK ON)(USING LOOP TIMING FOR PAYLOAD LOOPBACK)The network payload loopback is active.

NETWORK LINE-LB = ON (LINE LOOPBACK ON)The network line loopback is active

Table 7-5 Alert and alarm messages responding to a STATUS? command (continued)

Page 180: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-26

LOSS OF NTWK MGMT COMM CONTINUITY

The master station detects a break in the network ring. This can mean a break due to multiple master stations in the ring, a hardware failure at a station in the ring, or a station mode is incorrectly set

NETWK MGMT COMM OUT OF FRAME

The station cannot detect the frame boundaries on incoming traffic. This can be caused by an E1 network link failure, a hardware failure, or incorrect station mode

CHANNEL CARD CONFLICT WITH NTWK MGMT COMM

The local channel card data is conflicting with outgoing network management traffic. For example, if DS0 is set for time slot 12 and a channel card is programmed to transmit data in time slot 12. Channel module data has priority over network management traffic

SWITCHED TO REDUNDANT COMMON MODULE

The backup common module has been activated, taking over the functions of the primary common module

Table 7-5 Alert and alarm messages responding to a STATUS? command (continued)

Page 181: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-27

7.5.3 Determining the Configuration of a Common ModuleThe configuration (setup) of a CM-5 can be determined by issuing a CONFIG? command of the general form:

For example, to determine the current setup of the DI-A module in an ACS-165 multiplexer with an address of 9, issue the following command:

The response to a CONFIG? command always contains the following setup information about the addressed CM-5:

• primary timing mode

• fallback timing mode

• T1 framing format

• T1 line code

A typical response might be:

In addition, the response may contain one or more of the following messages:

7.5.4 Changing Common Module Setup ParametersThe setup of a CM-5 can be changed by issuing SET commands with the appropriate parameter names and values. Table 7-6 on page 7-28 lists the CM-5 setup parameters that can be changed remotely. For example, to set line code to AMI in an ACS-163 terminal multiplexer with an address of 11, issue the following command:

<ADDRESS>:<SUBADDRESS>:<CONFIG?>:;

9:DI-A:CONFIG?:;

* OK PTIME = THRU (PRIMARY TIMING) FTIME = INT (FALLBACK TIMING) FRAMING = ESF CODE = B8ZS;

PAYLD-LB = ON (PAYLOAD LOOPBACK ON)(USING LOOP TIMING FOR PAYLOAD LOOPBACK)

LINE-LB = ON (LINE LOOPBACK ON)

EQPT-LB = ON (EQUIPMENT LOOPBACK ON)

11:TERM:SET:CODE=AMI;

Page 182: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationShelf-Level and Common Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-28

Table 7-6 Parameter names and values for SET commands issued to a CM-5

Parameter Function Values Sets the parameter to:

FRAMING T1 framing format

ESF Extended superframe

SF Superframe. Also known as "D4"

CODE T1 line code

B8ZS Bipolar with 8-zero substitution

AMI Alternate mark inversion

PTIME Primary timing mode

INT Internal (terminal multiplexers only)

EXT External (terminal multiplexers only)

LOOP Loop (terminal multiplexers only)

THRU Through (drop & insert multiplexers only)

LINE-LB T1 line loopback

ON Activate the line loopback

OFF Deactivate the line loopback

PAYLD-LB T1 payload loopback

ON Activate the payload loopback

OFF Deactivate the payload loopback

EQPT-LB T1 equipment loopback

ON Activate the equipment loopback

OFF Deactivate the equipment loopback

CAUTION: Do not activate the payload and equipment loopbacks simultaneously. When the control circuit is carried as a channel on the T1 circuit, never command the far end multiplexer to initiate an equipment loopback. You will not be able to turn this loopback off by remote control

CH-ALM Selects alarms from the channel card SCB addresses that can generate a shelf alarm

ALL All SCB addresses reporting an alarm condition will be logically sent to the shelf alarm

NONE No SCB addresses reporting an alarm condition will be sent to the shelf alarm

1 to 36 The SCB address (1-36) will be sent to the shelf alarm. Any subsequent SCB address number will also be sent to the shelf alarm

RESET Resets the CM-5 to factory defaults

DFLT Default settings are:FRAMING = ESFCODE = B8ZSPTIME = INT (on terminal multiplexers)PTIME = THRU (on drop & insert multiplexers)LINE-LB = OFFPAYLD-LB = OFFEQPT-LB = OFFCH-ALM = ALLAll other CM-5 parameters are not affected by a RESET command

Page 183: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-29

7.6 Channel Module Remote AccessMost of the channel modules available for use with ACS-160 Series multiplexers can be set up and monitored remotely. Specifically, the SET, CONFIG? and STATUS? commands may be issued to channel modules by using a subaddress of the form Cn, where n is the card address of the target channel module. Valid card (or module) addresses range from 1 to 36.

As discussed earlier, setting hardware switches on each channel module determines its card address. In a 3RU shelf, we recommend setting the card address of each channel module to its physical slot number (3...18). In an expansion shelf, set the address of each channel module to its physical slot number plus 18. For example, a channel module located in physical slot 4 of an expansion shelf should be assigned a card address of 22.

It is important to note again that remote communication with channel modules located in ACS-165 drop/insert multiplexers can only take place through the remote port of the DI-A CM-5. Channel module commands received by the DI-B CM-5 will be ignored.

In a dual terminal multiplexer, each CM-5 communicates only with the channel modules in its section of the multiplexer. Each terminal operates independently of the other. However, an alert or alarm generated by either terminal will create an alert or alarm condition on the shelf.

7.6.1 Determining the Status of a Channel ModuleTo determine the status of a given channel module in an ACS-160 Series multiplexer, issue a STATUS? command in the following form:

where n is the number of the target channel module. For example, to request the status of channel module #4 in multiplexer #15, issue the command:

Note that the subaddress field in channel module STATUS? commands is always of the form Cn, regardless of whether the module is located in a terminal or a drop/insert multiplexer.

<ADDRESS>:CN:STATUS?:;

15:C4:STATUS?:;

Page 184: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-30

The response to a valid channel module STATUS? command indicates whether the module is in an alarm or alert state, and may provide other information as well, depending on the specific channel module type. The response always takes this general form:

An example of a response to a STATUS? command sent to a PT-150A program audio transmitter is shown in Table 7-7.

7.6.2 Determining the Configuration of a Channel Module To determine the configuration of a given channel module in an ACS-160 Series multiplexer, issue a CONFIG? command in the following form:

where n is the number of the target channel module. For example, to determine the setup of channel module #4 in multiplexer #20, issue the following command:

* OKCHANNEL CARD NN, TYPE MMM(ONE OR TWO LINES INDICATING ALERT/ALARM CONDI-TIONS, IF PRESENT, FOLLOWED BY ONE OR MORE LINES STATING THE VALUES OF EACH "S" [STATUS] PARAME-TER);

Table 7-7 Explanation of a typical STATUS? response

Response Description

* OK A valid command was received

CHANNEL CARD 3, TYPE 194 Channel card (module) # 3 is a PT-150Aa

S01 = 1 (B00000001) The left channel analog input is active

S02 = 0 (B00000000) The right channel analog input is idle

S03 = 0 (B00000000) The left channel input is not in overload

S04 = 0 (B00000000); The right channel input is not in overload

a. Channel card type, which is located in the second line of the response, is a number assigned by Intraplex to each different type (generally, each different model) of remotely controllable channel module. The type number, and definitions for the "S" (status) parameters maintained by each type of channel module, are found in Appendix A of the individual channel module manuals.

<ADDRESS>:CN:CONFIG?:;

20:C4:CONFIG?:;

Page 185: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-31

The response to a valid channel module CONFIG? command has the following general form:

An example of a response to a CONFIG? command issued to a PT-150A program audio transmitter is shown in Table 7-8.

Definitions of the "P" codes (setup parameters) for each type of channel module are found in Appendix A of the individual channel module manuals.

* OK CHANNEL CARD NN, TYPE MMM UNDER REMOTE (OR LOCAL) CONTROL SRVC = ON (OR OFF) (ONE OR MORE LINES STATING THE VALUES OF EACH "P" (SETUP) PARAMETER);

Table 7-8 Explanation of a typical CONFIG? response

Response Description

* OK A valid command was received

CHANNEL CARD 4, TYPE 194 Channel card (module) # 4 is a PT-150Aa

UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Set to remote control

SRVC = ON Service is on (module is active)

P01 = 1 (B00000001) First left channel time slot is set to 1

P02 = 2 (B00000010) Second left channel time slot is set to 2

P03 = 3 (B00000011) First right channel time slot is set to 3

P04 = 4 (B00000100) Second right channel time slot is set to 4

P05 = 1 (B00000001) Set to 15kHz bandwidth

P06 = 1 (B00000001) Both left and right channels are active

P07 = 1 (B00000001) Left channel is set to 15-bit coding

P08 = 1 (B00000001) Right channel is set to 15-bit coding

P09 = 0 (B00000000) Set for terminal (or DI-A) operation

P10 = 1 (B00000001); The scrambler is on

a. Channel card type, which is located in the second line of the response, is a number assigned by Intraplex to each different type (generally, each different model) of remotely controllable channel module. The type number, and definitions for the "S" (status) parameters maintained by each type of channel module, are found in Appendix A of the individual channel module manuals.

Page 186: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-32

7.6.3 Changing the Configuration of a Channel ModuleThe configuration of a channel module can be changed by issuing SET commands with the appropriate subaddress and parameter. For example, to turn off (disable) channel module #4 in multiplexer #20, you would issue the following command:

Or, assuming that channel module #4 in multiplexer #20 is a PT-150A (program audio transmitter), you could select 16-bit coding for its left and right channels by issuing the two commands shown in Table 7-9 below.

Parameter values for channel modules may be entered in the parameter field of a SET command as either decimal or binary numbers. For example, the following two commands are perceived as identical by the multiplexer:

Caution: Binary numbers must be preceded by the letter "B" (as shown) or they will be interpreted as decimal numbers.

7.6.4 Examples of Channel Card Remote ConfigurationThe following two examples illustrate the remote operation of channel cards in ACS-160 Series multiplexers.

7.6.4.1 Example 1: Turning Modules On and OffFor this example, assume that the user has a point-to-point system with one program audio receiver module in the shelf at his location at site A and two program audio transmitter modules in the shelf at site B (Figure 7-5 on page 7-33). Each transmitter module is receiving as its analog input (program feed 1 and program feed 2) a 15 kHz stereo program audio signal. The two transmitter modules and the receiver module are all set to time slots 15, 16, 17, and 18. The shelf at Site B is connected via phone line and modem to the user's terminal. Its password is "GREEN."

20:C4:SET:SRVC = OFF;

Table 7-9 Commands for setting the coding for a PT-150A

Command Description

20:C4:SET:P07 = 0; SET THE LEFT CHANNEL CODING TO 16 BITS

20:C4:SET:P08 = 0; SET THE RIGHT CHANNEL CODING TO 16 BITS

<MULTIPLEXER ADDRESS>:<CARD ADDRESS>:SET:P2 = 3;<MULTIPLEXER ADDRESS>:<CARD ADDRESS>:SET:P2 = B00000011;

Page 187: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-33

At site B, one transmitter module is set to card address 12 and the other is set to card address 13. The module at address 12 is currently active, which means that program feed 1 is being transmitted to site A. However, the user wishes to switch over to transmitting program feed 2.

Figure 7-5 Turning modules on and off using remote control

First, the user types the command:

The system acknowledges the command with the response:

The remote port is now unlocked. If the user then types the command:

The system response is shown in Table 7-10 on page 7-34.

::UNLOCK:GREEN;

* OK;

:C12:CONFIG?:;

Page 188: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-34

.

Note that if the user types:

then the response from the system will be the same, except that line two will read CHANNEL CARD 13,TYPE 194 and line four will read SRVC = OFF.

To make the desired changes, the user first types:

The user can verify that the change was successful by again typing:

Table 7-10 Explanation of a CONFIG? response for example 1

Response Description

* OK A valid query was received

CHANNEL CARD 12, TYPE 194 The card is slot 12 is a PT-150Aa

UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Set to remote control

SRVC = ON Service is on (module is active)

P01 = 15 (B00001111) First left channel time slot is set to 15

P02 = 16 (B00010000) Second left channel time slot is set to 16

P03 = 17 (B00010001) First right channel time slot is set to 17

P04 = 18 (B00010010) Second right channel time slot is set to 18

P05 = 1 (B00000001) Set to 15kHz bandwidth

P06 = 1 (B00000001) Both left and right channels are active

P07 = 1 (B00000001) Left channel is set to 15-bit coding

P08 = 1 (B00000001) Right channel is set to 15-bit coding

P09 = 0 (B00000000) Set for terminal (or DI-A) operation

P10 = 0 (B00000000); The scrambler is off

a. Channel card type, which is located in the second line of the response, is a number assigned by Intraplex to each different type (generally, each different model) of remotely controllable channel module. The type number, and definitions for the "S" (status) parameters maintained by each type of channel module, are found in Appendix A of the individual channel module manuals.

:C13:CONFIG?:;

:C12:SET:SRVC=OFF;

:C12:CONFIG?:;

Page 189: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-35

The system responds:

The user then types:

The user checks that this change was successful by typing:

and observing that line 4 now reads SRVC = ON.

Program Feed 2 is now being transmitted from Site B to Site A on this T1 circuit, using time slots 15 through 18.

Finally, the user locks the remote port again with the command:

The system responds:

* OKCHANNEL CARD 12, TYPE 194UNDER REMOTE CONTROLSRVC = OFFP01 = 15 (B00001111)P02 = 16 (B00010000)P03 = 17 (B00010001)P04 = 18 (B00010010)P05 = 1 (B00000001)P06 = 1 (B00000001)P07 = 1 (B00000001)P08 = 1 (B00000001)P09 = 0 (B00000000)P10 = 0 (B00000000);

:C13:SET:SRVC = ON;

:C13:CONFIG?:;

::LOCK:;

* OK;

Page 190: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-36

7.6.5 CONFIG? Responses - Channel Module AlarmsThe channel module alarm mask setting is reported in the ISiCL CONFIG? response. The response is in the format:CH-ALM= <Active Subaddress Alarms>

Channel modules alarms are user-maskable through ISiCL. This allows the user to configure the multiplexer so that only program audio channel modules can generate shelf alarms. Check your channel module’s documentation to determine if it supports alarm masking.

Note: If a channel module is masked off and it fails, it will generate a shelf alert.

7.6.5.1 Example 2: Changing the ConfigurationFor this example, assume that the user is operating a network, with terminal multiplexers at sites B and C, and a drop/insert multiplexer with an address of 7 at site A. Multiplexer 7 contains a program audio transmitter whose card address is 4. Last night it was used to transmit a concert in 15 kHz high fidelity stereo on time slots 11, 12, 13, and 14 to site B. Today it will be used to transmit a sports event in 7.5 kHz monaural on time slot 9 to site C. Figure 7-6 on page 7-37 shows this setup.

Table 7-11 ISiCL syntax for channel module alarm masking

Parameter Legal Values Description

CH-ALM ALL, NONE,1 to 36

Select alarms from the channel module subaddresses that are OR’d onto the shelf alarmIf “ALL” is entered, then all subaddresses reporting an alarm condition will be logically OR’d onto the shelf alarmIf “NONE” is entered, then no subaddresses reporting an alarm condition will be logically OR’d onto the shelf alarmIf a number 1-36 is entered, then that subaddress will be OR’d onto the shelf alarm. Any subsequent subaddress number will also be OR’d. For example, if the ISiCL commands:

::SET:CH-ALM=NONE;::SET:CH-ALM=1;::SET:CH-ALM=2;and entered, then alarms for channel modules on subaddress 1 and 2 are OR’d onto the shelf alarmALL is the factory default

Page 191: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-37

Figure 7-6 Changing channel module configuration by remote control

Page 192: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-38

Assume here that the password for the multiplexer is "BLUE". Remember that all remote communication with channel modules on a drop/insert shelf is through the DI-A CM-5. To unlock the remote port, the user types:

The multiplexer responds:* OK;

To make the necessary changes, the user first types:

The user then verifies the configuration of the channel card by typing:

The system responds as shown in Table 7-12.

7:DI-A:UNLOCK:BLUE;

7:C4:SET:SRVC = OFF;

7:C4:CONFIG?:;

Table 7-12 Explanation of a CONFIG? response for example 2

Response Description

* OK A valid query was received

CHANNEL CARD 4, TYPE 194 The card is slot 4 is a PT-150Aa

UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Set to remote control

SRVC = OFF The card’s output is disabled

P01 = 11 (B00001011) First left channel time slot is set to 11

P02 = 12 (B00001100) Second left channel time slot is set to 12

P03 = 13 (B00001101) First right channel time slot is set to 13

P04 = 14 (B00001110) Second right channel time slot is set to 14

P05 = 1 (B00000001) Set to 15kHz bandwidth

P06 = 1 (B00000001) Both left and right channels are active

P07 = 0 (B00000000) Left channel is set to 16-bit coding

P08 = 0 (B00000000) Right channel is set to 16-bit coding

P09 = 0 (B00000000) Set to transmit via the DI-A port

P10 = 0 (B00000000); The scrambler is off

a. Channel card type, which is located in the second line of the response, is a number assigned by Intraplex to each different type (generally, each different model) of remotely controllable channel module. The type number, and definitions for the "S" (status) parameters maintained by each type of channel module, are found in Appendix A of the individual channel module manuals.

Page 193: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationChannel Module Remote Access

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-39

The user enters the four commands shown inTable 7-13.

After each command, the system responds:* OK;

The user verifies that the changes are correct by typing:

The system responds as above. Note that the second time slot for the left channel and both time slots for the right channel have not been changed, and they will show up on the configuration listing with their old settings. This does not matter, because when the PT-150A module is configured to transmit a single 7.5 kHz channel, only the first time slot on the left channel is active.

The user then turns the card back on with the command:

Finally, the user relocks the remote port on the DI-A common module with the command:

THE SYSTEM RESPONDS:* OK;The changeover is complete.

Table 7-13 Commands to change channel time slot and bandwidth

Command Description

7:C4:SET:P01 = 9; Set the first left channel time slot to 9

7:C4:SET:P05 = 0; Set to 7.5kHz mode

7:C4:SET:P06 = 0; Set right channel to OFF

7:C4:SET:P09 = 1; Set to transmit via the DI-B port

7:C4:CONFIG?:;

7:C4:SET:SRVC = ON;

7:DI-A:LOCK:;

Page 194: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-40

7.7 CSU FunctionsThis section provides an introduction to the ACS-160’s integrated CSU functions.

7.7.1 Introduction to CSU Line Performance StatisticsThe integrated CSU detects, organizes, and stores CSU line performance statistics in industry-standardized formats. You can use this data to identify existing line problems as well as monitor for developing problems.

Note: CSU statistics are only available when the CM-5 is operating in ESF mode. See Section 3.3.0.3, Displaying and Changing Items in the Basic Configuration Group, on page 3-3 and Table 3-2 on page 3-6 for information on verifying the CM-5’s frame format.

7.7.2 Selecting a CSU Line Performance Statistics Standard CSU line performance statistics can be presented in either of two industry formats: ANSI T1.403-1995 or AT&T TR54016. The integrated CSU’s factory default standard is ANSI. Use the Configuration Group to select the integrated CSU’s standard.

1. Press down repeatedly on the GROUP switch until the display reads TSEL.

2. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display reads CSU. Notice that CSU is underscored. This indicates an additional subgroup.

3. Press up once on the SET/NEXT switch to display Off, which is the first of three CSU options.

4. Press down repeatedly on the SET/NEXT switch until the display shows the standard you want to select.

5. To change modes, press up twice on the SET/NEXT switch. After the first press the green (top) LED blinks, indicating that a change is about to be made. After the second press it turns on continuously, indicating that the integrated CSU is now operating in the standard you selected.

Page 195: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-41

7.7.3 Accessing and Evaluating CSU Line Performance Statistics You can determine the performance status of a ACS-160 Series multiplexer by issuing one of the four ISiCL commands to its TERM, DI-A, or DI-B module. Table 7-14 on page 41 describes the four commands. Figure 7-7 on page 41 shows the relationship of the CSU line performance data commands to local and remote multiplexers.

Figure 7-7 Relationship of CSU line performance data commands to local and remote multiplexers

The following sections outline each command’s syntax, response format, and guidelines for evaluating the response data.

Table 7-14 Summary of ISiCL commands for CSU line performance data

Command Description

CSU_STAT? Queries local CSU line performance in ANSI T1.403-1995 compliant format

REMOTE_STAT? Queries remote CSU line performance in ANSI T1.403-1995 compliant format

ATT_STAT? Queries a summary of the ATT TR54016 performance registers

REGISTERS? Queries a detailed history of the ATT TR54016 performance registers

Page 196: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-42

7.7.3.1 Issuing the CSU_STAT? CommandYou can query the CSU line performance statistics of a ACS-160 Series multiplexer by issuing a CSU_STAT? command to its TERM, DI-A, or DI-B module. Table 7-15 shows examples of CSU_STAT? commands for ACS-160 Series multiplexers.

7.7.3.2 Issuing the REMOTE_STAT? CommandYou can query the remote CSU line performance of a ACS-160 Series multiplexer by issuing a REMOTE_STAT? command to its TERM, DI-A, or DI-B module. The remote end must be ANSI T1.403-1995 compatible. Table 7-16 shows examples of REMOTE_STAT? commands for ACS-160 Series multiplexers.

7.7.3.3 Evaluating CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? ResponsesThe CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? commands request the same format of data from the local and remote ends of your network, respectively.

Figure 7-8 on page 43 shows a typical response to the CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? commands.

Table 7-15 CSU_STAT? commands

Model Command

ACS-163 Terminal <ADDRESS>:TERM:CSU_STAT?:;

ACS-165 A direction <ADDRESS>:DI-A:CSU_STAT?:;

ACS-165 B direction <ADDRESS>:DI-B:CSU_STAT?:;

Table 7-16 REMOTE_STAT? command

Model Command

ACS-163 Terminal <ADDRESS>:TERM:REMOTE_STAT?:;

ACS-165 A direction <ADDRESS>:DI-A:REMOTE_STAT?:;

ACS-165 B direction <ADDRESS>:DI-B:REMOTE_STAT?:;

Page 197: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-43

Figure 7-8 Typical response to CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? commands

Table 7-17 describes the data in a CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? response.

* OK

ELAPS TIME 19:52:30

DETEC TIME 19:52:30

CRC=1

1<CRC<=5

5<CRC<=10

10<CRC<=100

100<CRC<=319

CRC>320

SEFE SEC

FBE SEC

BPV SEC

SLIP SEC

PLB SEC

YEL SEC

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Table 7-17 CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? response data

Data Description Typical Value

ELAPS TIME Elapse Time - The time the integrated CSU has been accumulating CSU line performance data

DETEC TIME Detection Time - The time the integrated CSU has been successfully receiving (REMOTE_STAT? command) or sending (CSU_STAT? command) ANSI T1.403 compatible performance report messages from the remote device

When the local/remote device is ANSI-compliant, DETEC TIME = ELAPS TIME - YEL SECWhen the local/remote device is neither ANSI- or AT&T-compliant and a signal is present, DETEC TIME remains constant at 0:00

CRC=1 CRC error events - The occurrence of a received CRC code that is not identical to the corresponding locally-calculated code

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any CRC errorsThe more CRC errors accumulated the greater the severity of the problem. CRC > 320 is equivalent to a severely errored second

1<CRC<=5

5<CRC<=10

10<CRC<=100

100<CRC<=319

CRC>320

Page 198: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-44

SEFE SEC Severely errored framing event seconds - The occurrence of two or more framing-bit-pattern errors within a 3 ms period. Contiguous 3 ms intervals are examined and the 3 ms period may coincide with the ESF. This framing-error indicator, while similar in form to criteria for declaring a terminal has lost framing, is only designed as a performance indicator; existing terminal out-of-frame criteria are the basis for terminal alarms

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any SEFE seconds

FBE SEC Framing synchronization bit error seconds - The occurrence of a frame-bit error in the received frame-bit pattern

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any FBE seconds

BPV SEC Bipolar violation seconds - A non-zero signal element in an AMI (bipolar) signal that has the same polarity as the previous non-zero signal element. See Section 6.2.1.2 for more information on bipolar violations

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any BPV seconds

SLIP SEC Controlled slips seconds - The occurrence of a replication, or deletion, of a DS1 frame at the receiving terminal. A controlled slip may occur when there is a difference between the timing of a synchronous receiving terminal and the received signal

Under normal operating conditions, you should never have any SLIP errors

PLB SEC Payload loopback seconds - A loopback which results in a 1.536 Mbps loopback of the payload of the signal received by the customer installation from the network installation maintaining bit-sequence integrity for the information bits

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any payload loopback seconds

YEL SEC Yellow alarm seconds - Signal transmitted if a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for some interval of time indicating an LOF (loss of frame) condition. Commonly referred to as yellow signal, also known as a remote alarm indication (RAI)

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any yellow alarm seconds

Table 7-17 CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? response data (continued)

Data Description Typical Value

Page 199: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-45

7.7.3.4 Clearing CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? DataEach CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? register can hold from 0 to 65535 events. When a register reaches 65535 events, it remains at that number until cleared to 0 with a CLEAR command. For example, to clear a ACS-163 multiplexer’s CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? registers, issue a command in the form:

Note: The CLEAR command will clear both the CSU_STAT? and REMOTE_STAT? registers. You cannot clear individual data registers.

7.7.3.5 Issuing the ATT_STAT? Command You can query a summary of the ACS-160 Series multiplexer’s AT&T TR54016 performance registers by issuing a ATT_STAT? command to its TERM, DI-A, or DI-B module. Table 7-18 shows examples of ATT _STAT? commands for ACS-160 Series multiplexers.

7.7.3.6 Evaluating ATT_STAT? ResponsesThe 15 minute ATT_STAT? registers can hold a maximum of 900 events, one for each second in the interval (60 seconds per minute X 15 minutes = 900 seconds). The 15 minute interval registers should never exceed 900.

The 24 hour registers can hold a maximum of 65535 events. If the number of events exceeds 65535, the register will remain at that number until the point when the most recent 24 hour period when the sum of the 15 minute intervals do not exceed it.

Note: The network can request that CSU line performance registers be reset to zero which may present a false indication of line performance.

Figure 7-9 on page 46 shows a typical response to the ATT_STAT? command. Table 7-20 on page 48 describes the data in an ATT_STAT? response.

<ADDRESS>:TERM:CLEAR:;

Table 7-18 ATT_STAT? command

Model Command

ACS-163 Terminal <ADDRESS>:TERM:ATT_STAT?:;

ACS-165 A direction <ADDRESS>:DI-A:ATT_STAT?:;

ACS-165 B direction <ADDRESS>:DI-B:ATT_STAT?:;

Page 200: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-46

Figure 7-9 Typical response to ATT_STAT? command

7.7.3.7 Issuing the REGISTERS? CommandYou can query a detailed history of the ACS-160 Series multiplexer’s AT&T TR54016 performance registers by issuing a REGISTERS? command to its TERM, DI-A, or DI-B module. Table 7-19 shows examples of REGISTERS? commands for ACS-160 Series multiplexers.

7.7.3.8 Evaluating REGISTERS? ResponsesThe REGISTERS detect events every second and store data in 15 minute intervals. There are 96 intervals (24 hours X 4 intervals per hour = 96 intervals) that record data. The registers store the most recent 24 hours of data.

Figure 7-10 on page 7-47 shows a typical response to the REGISTERS? command. Table 7-20 on page 48 describes the data in a REGISTERS? response.

* OK

MEASURE SECS

VALID INTERVALS

ERRORED SECS

UNAVAIL SECS

BUR ERRD SECS

SEV ERRD SECS

CTL SLIP SECS

LOSS OF FRAME

643

42

15MIN

0

0

0

0

0

0

24HR/TOT

0

0

0

0

0

0

Table 7-19 REGISTERS? command

Model Command

ACS-163 Terminal <ADDRESS>:TERM:REGISTERS?:;

ACS-165 A direction <ADDRESS>:DI-A:REGISTERS?:;

ACS-165 B direction <ADDRESS>:DI-B:REGISTERS?:;

Page 201: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-47

Figure 7-10 Typical response to REGISTERS? command

* OK

INT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

INT

17

18

�96

ES

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

ES

0

0

0

UAS

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

UAS

0

0

0

BES

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

BES

0

0

0

SES

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

SES

0

0

0

CSS

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

CSS

0

0

0

LOF

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

LOF

0

0

0

Page 202: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationCSU Functions

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-48

7.7.3.9 Clearing ATT_STAT? and REGISTERS? DataThere are no commands available to clear the ATT_STAT? and REGISTERS? registers.

Table 7-20 ATT_STAT? and REGISTERS? response data

Data Item Description Typical Values

MEASURE SECS Measured Seconds - The number of seconds the integrated CSU has been accumulating CSU line performance statistics in the current 15 minute interval. This register can hold a maximum value of 900 (60 seconds per minute x 15 minutes = 900 seconds)

Under normal operating conditions when the device is ANSI or AT&T-compliant, measured seconds should be between 0 and 900

VALID INTER-VALS

Valid Intervals - The number of complete 15 minute intervals that the integrated CSU has accumulated CSU line performance data. This register can hold a maximum value of 96 (four-15 minute intervals per hour x 24 hours = 96 intervals)

Under normal operating conditions, you should see a value between 0 and 96

ERRORED SECS(ES)

Errored seconds - A second with one or more ESF error events, that is, one or more CRC6 error events or one or more OOFs (out of frame)

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any errored seconds

UNAVAIL SECS(UAS)

Unavailable seconds - A count of one-second intervals during which service is unavailable

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any unavailable seconds

BUR ERRD SECS(BES)

Bursty errored seconds - A second with more than one, but less than 320 CRC6 error events

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any BES seconds

SEV ERRD SECS(SES)

Severely errored second - A second with 320 or more CRC6 error events OR one or more OOFs

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any SEFE seconds.

CTL SLIP SECS(CSS)

Controlled slips seconds - The occurrence of a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame at the receiving terminal. A controlled slip may occur when there is a difference between the timing of a synchronous receiving terminal and the received signal

Under normal operating conditions, you should never have any SLIP errors

LOSS OF FRAME(LOF)

Loss of frame - The occurrence of a DS1 terminal unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for some interval

Under normal operating conditions, you should not have any loss of frame in a 24 hour period

Page 203: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationConfiguring the CM-5TD Delay Feature

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-49

7.8 Configuring the CM-5TD Delay FeatureThe configuration and status monitoring of the optional delay feature are controlled by ISiCL through the remote control interface. The delay feature parameters are controlled using P (parameter) codes; the status is retrieved using S (status) codes. These features correspond to the manual switch settings discussed in the TDLY section of Table 3-2 on page 3-6 and the procedures outlined in Section 3.8.1.2, Setting the CM-5TD Subaddress, on page 3-33.

For example, to set smooth (hitless) buffer depth change on a CM-5TD whose delay feature has an address of 2, and with a multiplexer address of 11, issue the following command:

7.8.1 Service CommandYou can turn service on or off for the delay feature by sending SRVC = ON or SRVC = OFF in the ISiCL parameter field with a SET command.

7.8.2 P CodesP codes allow you to set parameters on the delay feature of the CM-5TD when used in the parameter field of an ISiCL SET command.

There are four P codes for the delay feature of the CM-5TD: P01, P02, P03, and P04. Each is a number from 0 to 255, also represented as an eight-digit binary number in parentheses. Table 7-21 on page 50 describes the meanings of the P codes. P codes also appear in the response to a CONFIG? query showing the current parameter settings on the card as shown in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Typical CM-5TD response to a CONFIG? query

WHEN USING BINARY NUMBERS IN THE PARAMETER FIELD OF A SET COMMAND, THEY MUST BE PRECEDED BY THE LET-TER “B.” FOR EXAMPLE:<multiplexer address>:<card address>:SET:P02 = B00000001;

11:C2:SET:P02=B00000000;

* OK CHANNEL CARD 1, TYPE 12 UNDER REMOTE CONTROL SRVC = ON P01 = 0 (B00000000) P02 = 0 (B00000000) P03 = 3 (B00000011) P04 = 135 (B10000111);

Page 204: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationConfiguring the CM-5TD Delay Feature

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-50

7.8.3 S CodesThere are four S codes for the delay feature of a CM-5TD module. These appear in response to a STATUS? query and are defined in Table 7-22 on page 7-51.

Like the P codes, the S codes are displayed in both decimal and binary form as shown in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12 Typical CM-5TD response to a STATUS? query

Table 7-21 Delay feature P codes

P Code

Binary Digits

Value Description1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P01 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0�

0 0 Sets normal polarity for the RS-422 control input

1 Sets inverted polarity for the RS-422 control input (can correct for reversed wires at the RS-422 interface)

B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 0�

Not used These digits must be set to zero

P02 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0�

0 or 1 Most significant bit of the delay setting (Section 7.8.5, Changing the delay setting using the RS-232 remote port, on page 7-52)

B 0 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 Not used These digits must be set to zero

B 0�

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Step (non-hitless) change in depth

1 Smooth (hitless) change in depth

P03 B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 or 1 Second through ninth most significant bits of the delay setting (see Section 7.8.5, Changing the delay setting using the RS-232 remote port, on page 7-52)

P04 B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 or 1 Eight least significant bits of the delay setting (see Section 7.8.5, Changing the delay setting using the RS-232 remote port, on page 7-52)

* OK CHANNEL CARD 1, TYPE 12 S01 = 0 (B00000000) S02 = 0 (B00000000) S03 = 3 (B00000011) S04 = 135 (B10000111);

Page 205: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationConfiguring the CM-5TD Delay Feature

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-51

Table 7-22 Delay feature S codes

S Code

Binary Digits

Value Description1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S01 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0�

Phase-locked loop (PLL) status

0 PLL is locked (LOCK indicator is on)

1 PLL is not locked (LOCK indicator is off)

B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0�

0 Buffer status

0 Normal (BUFFER indicator is off)

1 Overflow/underflow in previous second (BUFFER indicator is on). Note: the BUFFER indicator reacts instantly, while the buffer status bit remains “1” for about a second after the event

B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 0 NotUsed

S02 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0�

0 or 1 The most significant bit of the programmed delay setting

B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 NotUsed

S03 B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 or 1 The second through ninth most significant bits of the programmed delay setting

S04 B 0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0�

0 or 1 The eight least significant bits of the programmed delay setting

Page 206: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationConfiguring the CM-5TD Delay Feature

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-52

7.8.4 OperationThe CM-5TD has a set of indicators located behind the TIMING indicators. Table 7-23 describes these indicators.

The delay setting is determined by the number of bits used in the buffer. The buffer depth can range from 6 bits to 131,076 bits. Each T1 (1.544 Mbps) bit has a duration of 647.67 ns, this allows you to set a delay time ranging from 3.89 µS to 84.00 mS.

The delay is set by sending a 17-bit binary number to the CM-5TD; the CM-5TD takes this number and adds five to it, and uses the result to set the buffer depth in bits.

The 17-bit number can be sent to the CM-5TD in two ways — through the RS-232 serial remote port using ISiCL P codes (see Section 7.8.5, Changing the delay setting using the RS-232 remote port, on page 7-52), or using the RS-422 control “port” (see Section 7.8.6, Changing the delay setting using the RS-422 control port, on page 7-54).

Caution: Valid numbers are binary 00000000000000001 through 11111111111111111 (1 through 131,071 decimal). Do not send all zeroes.

7.8.5 Changing the delay setting using the RS-232 remote port This method uses ISiCL SET commands with P codes to change the delay value. The ISiCL commands are sent to the CM-5TD through the RS-232 remote port.

The settings of P04, P03, and the least significant bit of P02 are used together to create a 17-bit binary number (Figure 7-13 on page 7-53); this number plus five gives the actual instantaneous buffer depth.

Table 7-23 CM-5TD indicators

Indicator Description

BUF Buffer. This yellow indicator lights when the delay buffer overflows or underflows, indicating that the input clock frequency is going outside the PLL lock range

LOCK This green indicator lights when the actual delay is identical to the configured delay

SRVC This green indicator lights when the delay functionality is activated

Page 207: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationConfiguring the CM-5TD Delay Feature

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-53

Figure 7-13 P Codes Used to Change the Buffer Depth (Delay Time)

The delay value of the hardware is updated whenever a parameter is changed, so when making multiple-byte changes, it is best to update the most significant bits first. Also, when the desired buffer depth is known only approximately, it may be useful to make a large change in step mode to the approximate depth first, and then make finer adjustments in smooth mode, so as to minimize both the total time required to make the change and the overall amount of T1 circuit disruption.

Example: As an example, let’s look at a situation where the desired delay is first determined to be approximately 30 mS, and closer measurements then indicate that the true target value is 29.95 mS.

First, determine the correct buffer depth (in bits) for the desired delay. The algorithm for this is:

• Divide the desired delay time by the T1 (1.544) bit duration (488 nS).

• Subtract five from the result.

• Look at this number in 17-bit binary format.

For this example, we get:

30 mS ÷ 647.67 nS = 4632046320 – 5 = 46315Decimal 46315 = binary01011010011101011|||MSBP3P4

29.95 mS ÷ 647.67 nS = 4624346243 – 5 = 46238Decimal 46238 = binary01011010010011110|||MSBP3P4

0 1 0 1 1 1 1

P4P3

Most significant bit (MSB)

Least significant bit (LSB)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

P2

These 17 bits taken as a single binary numberrepresent the buffer depth setting (less 5)

Change mode:0 = Step mode1 = Smooth mode

Not used

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Page 208: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationConfiguring the CM-5TD Delay Feature

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-54

Then, to make these changes, issue the following series of ISiCL commands:

7.8.6 Changing the delay setting using the RS-422 control port This method uses the RS-422 control “port” to change the delay value.The control port is part of the physical external timing input connector. See Table 2-6 on page 2-13 for the MA-215/MA-217B timing in port pin assignments.

The control port is a receive-only RS-422/RS-485 serial port configured to accept an asynchronous 9600 bps data stream with one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, and one stop bit.

The control port recognizes four different information bytes. Each of these four bytes consists of two identifying bits and six data bits (Figure 7-14 on page 54); the 24 data bits contained in these four bytes are identical to the 24 bits in P02, P03, and P04 under ISiCL (see Section 7.8.2, P Codes, on page 7-49). The least significant (right-hand) bit is transmitted first.

As when using P codes, it is best to send the most significant bits first.

Figure 7-14 RS-422 Control Port Information Bytes

:C2:SET:P2=B00000000; Select step change and set most significant bit to 0

:C2:SET:P3=B10110100; Set high-order 8 bits for 30 mS

:C2:SET:P4=B11101011; Set low-order 8 bits for 30 mS

:C2:SET:P2=100000000; Select smooth change

:C2:SET:P4=B10011110; Set low-order 8 bits for 29.95 mS (no change in high-order 8 bits is required)

Most significant bit (MSB)

Least significant bit (LSB)

These 17 bits taken as a single binary numberrepresent the buffer depth setting (less 5)

Change mode:0 = Step mode1 = Smooth mode

Not used

0 1 0 1 1 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Byte Type 1

0

ID ConfigurationData

0 1 0 0 0

Byte Type 2

ID ConfigurationData

1 0 0 0 0

Byte Type 3

ID ConfigurationData

0 0

Byte Type 4

ID ConfigurationData

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1

Page 209: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-55

7.9 Network Management Communications

7.9.1 IntroductionIntraplex multiplexers can be used in a variety of network configurations ranging from simple point-to-point systems to complex meshed networks combining ring and star topologies.

Control of Intraplex network access products can be accomplished by connecting a personal computer or terminal to the RS-232 or RS-485 control port on the CM-5 common modules, which provide overall shelf management as well as network-side transmission interfaces. The RS-485 ports on CM-5’s can be daisy-chained together providing a single network management access point for several co-located equipment shelves.

Intraplex network access products can also be accessed remotely using internal DS0 communications capability. DS0 communication enables the multiplexer (using its common module) to pass network management commands to the CM-5 connected at the far end of the T1 line. Communication is accomplished over an adjustable payload bandwidth in a DS0 time slot of the T1.

DS0 communication is part of an overall network management strategy for Intraplex systems, allowing integrated network management access for multiple network elements from a single gateway network element.

The COMM (network communications) group on the CM-5 must be configured properly for network communications. The COMM group can be accessed through the common module basic configuration menu. Detailed explanations on displaying and editing functions in the CM-5 basic menu are provided in Section 3.3.0.3, Displaying and Changing Items in the Basic Configuration Group, on page 3-3. Descriptions of the settings in the COMM group are shown in Table 7-24 on page 7-56.

Page 210: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-56

The following control settings must be set on each CM-5 basic menu COMM group for successful communication on a DS0 network:

• set the common module to master, slave, or bridge mode(default: off)

• select a data rate of 8, 16, 32, or 64 kbps (default: 32 kbps)

• select a DS0 communications time slot(default: time slot 24 for T1)

7.9.2 Common Module Network ConfigurationA network or subnetwork must have a single master (primary) station that controls all the communications and one or more slave (secondary) stations. Only one slave can be transmitting at any time, therefore the master controls all slave transmissions. The bridge mode is used during maintenance, allowing network communications to remain functional by completing a DS0 loop while a personal computer can be directly connected to the bridged CM-5 for Intraplex Simple Command Language (ISiCL) commands.

Table 7-24 Network communication settings

Abridged Basic Configuration Menu

COMM Network communications parameters

CNFG Network configuration

OFF* Turn network communications off

MSTR Set the multiplexer to master mode

SLV Set the multiplexer to slave mode

BRDG Set the multiplexer to bridge mode

RATE Networking data rate

8 KB Set the data rate to 8 Kbps (1 bit/DS0)

16 KB Set the data rate to 16 Kbps (2 bits/DS0)

32 KB* Set the data rate to 32 Kbps (4 bits/DS0)

64 KB Set the data rate to 64 Kbps (8 bits/DS0)

TSLT Set the time slot used for DS0 communications to and from the network interface

1 to 24a T1 setting

a. Indicates factory default.

Page 211: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-57

Caution: A bridged CM-5 cannot communicate in a network (see Figure 7-15).

ISiCL works in a command–response mode, where the CM-5 generates messages only in response to ISiCL commands from an external controller. If a CM-5 communications configuration (CNFG) is set to OFF, network communications cannot be completed through the module. If a CM-5 CNFG is set to SLAVE, a PC cannot be connected for ISiCL commands (Figure 7-15).

All CM-5’s within a network must have identical data rates and time slot settings to communicate with each other.

Figure 7-15 Common module configuration settings

7.9.2.1 Common Module Network AddressEach common module can be assigned a network address — a four-digit number from 0001 to 9999 used to distinguish different multiplexers on a common network.

If multiple multiplexers are connected to a common network, each multiplexer may receive every command issued by the central controller. By including the target multiplexer’s network address in the ISiCL command you can ensure that only the target multiplexer responds to that command.

The network address is an optional setting. If remote control is not used, or if the controller is connected directly to a single CM-5, it is not necessary to set up and use the network address.

Page 212: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-58

To prevent unauthorized or accidental changes, multiplexer addresses cannot be changed by remote control. Each multiplexer’s address must be entered using the CM-5 front-panel user interface.

7.9.2.2 Multiple Common Module AddressingFor multiplexers with multiple CM-5’s, each CM-5 can be assigned different addresses or no address at all. (However, redundant CM-5’s must be set to the same address as the primary CM-5.)

For drop and insert multiplexers (ACS-165 and ACS-168), set the same network address for each CM-5. To target a specific CM-5, use the DI-A or DI-B subaddress.

For dual terminal multiplexers (ACS-166 and ACS-169), set different network addresses for each CM-5. In this way you can treat each CM-5 as a “separate” multiplexer.

Procedures for setting the CM-5 addresses are outlined in Section 7.2.2.1, Setting the Network Address (ADDR Group), on page 7-5.

7.9.3 Network TopologiesIntraplex equipment can be connected in a wide variety of network topologies. It is possible for the user to establish network management communications throughout any of these networks using a combination of RS-485 and DS0 communications.

7.9.3.1 Sub-networksEach group of controlled CM-5’s are referred to as a control sub-network or “subnet.”

Figure 7-16 shows six CM-5’s grouped into three separate control subnets that are controlled by a network computer at one location.

Figure 7-16 Example of network communications using three separate control subnets

Page 213: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-59

Basic setup of a network is accomplished as follows:

1. Set all the stations in each subnet to the same communications data rate and time slot.

2. Set one station in each subnet to master mode. Set all remaining stations within the subnet to either bridge or slave mode.

3. Connect the PC controlling each subnet to the master station via an RS-232 on the remote port.

Caution: Do not connect a PC to the remote port of slave stations. A PC can be connected via RS-232 to the remote port of a bridge station, but the PC will only communicate with the bridge.

4. If connecting one subnet to another, connect an RS-485 from the remote port of a subnet slave on the first subnet to the remote port of the subnet master for the second subnet.

7.9.3.2 Point-to-PointPoint-to-point configurations are straightforward. In these systems, the PC connects to a CM-5 and controls both the local CM-5 and the CM-5 at the far end as shown in Figure 7-17.

Figure 7-17 Network communication in a simple point-to-point configuration

7.9.3.3 Drop/Insert A point-to-point configuration can be extended to control multiple point-to-point links between the same two locations using only a single DS0 channel or subchannel. In Figure 7-18, the system is extended to include a drop and insert multiplexer.

Figure 7-18 Network communication in a drop and insert configuration

Page 214: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-60

7.9.3.4 Star ConfigurationsIntraplex E1 and T1 CrossConnect’s digital cross-connect (DCS) capabilities make it possible to create new network topologies. One of these is the star network as shown in Figure 1 on page 60. The star configuration shown includes four common modules connected through a central cross-connect node. A common DS0 channel or subchannel is shared for network management communications among all the common module units connected to the DCS system.

Figure 1 Network communication on a CrossConnect star configuration

7.9.3.5 Ring ConfigurationsA variety of ring configurations are possible using CrossConnect products. In general, the rings are formed by cross-connections within CrossConnect units. T1 or E1 lines extend from the ring to terminating T1 or E1 cross-connect multiplexers using common modules. It is also possible to form rings using drop and insert multiplexers connected to each CrossConnect node.

7.9.3.6 Other ConfigurationsA wide variety of network configurations are possible using Intraplex CrossConnect products (see Figure 2 on page 61). Contact an Intraplex representative for more information on how Intraplex CrossConnect products can effectively manage complex network communication requirements.

Page 215: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-61

Figure 2 Network communication in a multiple CrossConnect configuration

7.9.4 CrossConnect Mapping for Network Management CommunicationsWhen network management communication is used in a ring, star, or other complex network configuration, special attention must be given to programming

Page 216: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationNetwork Management Communications

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-62

the CrossConnect systems. The DS0 time slot designated to transport the network management communications must pass through each common module in the subnet. The designated time slot for network communications is programmed in a pass-through configuration on a CrossConnect system. Figure 3 demonstrates an example of the pass-through configuration for CrossConnect systems A and B.

Figure 3 Pass-through configuration

The required time slot mapping for CrossConnect A shown in Figure 3 is:

receive port 1, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 2, time slot 24

receive port 2, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 3, time slot 24

receive port 3, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 4, time slot 24

receive port 4, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 5, time slot 24

receive port 5, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 6, time slot 24

receive port 6, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 1, time slot 24

The required time slot mapping for CrossConnect B in Figure 3 is:

receive port 1, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 2, time slot 24

receive port 2, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 3, time slot 24

receive port 3, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 4, time slot 24

receive port 4, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 5, time slot 24

receive port 5, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 6, time slot 24

receive port 6, time slot 24 mapped to transmit port 1, time slot 24

Page 217: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-63

7.10 IntraGuide SoftwareIntraGuide Configuration and Management software allows you to view multiple Intraplex systems from one control point.

IntraGuide provides a graphic user interface (GUI) that makes it easy to:

• visually check system status

• interrogate for alarm conditions

• monitor and log hardware and communications links

The program has an intuitive look and feel that pleases both the experienced technician and the casual user. IntraGuide even works offline. Configurations can be created in advance, saved, and imported later.

7.10.1 Online HelpThe IntraGuide online help features both user interface help and Intraplex equipment help. The online help is also context-sensitive and designed to provide the user with all information required to install and use IntraGuide.

Page 218: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-64

7.10.2 Getting StartedTo load IntraGuide, run SETUP.EXE directly from the CD-ROM. This will launch the setup program and prompt you through the remainder of the installation process.

IntraGuide can also be downloaded from the Harris-Intraplex website at http://www.intraguide.com.

To get started with IntraGuide, ensure that the cabling is properly connected from the equipment to the PC (See Section 7.10.3 and Section 7.10.4 below).

Ensure that each of the channel cards are set to REMOTE. If the REMOTE is not enabled, you can still read the setting from the channel cards but cannot make changes to the programmable card settings.

Launch the IntraGuide program. You will find the program located in the Start menu under Programs�IntraGuide.

Select Auto Detect Devices from the Setup menu. This will allow the program to go online with the equipment and build an equipment list. Follow the prompts for detecting the channel cards.

Note: IntraGuide does not work with all Intraplex channel modules. To see the latest list of compatible cards, look in "alphabetic card index" in the index (or under "operations, system cards" in the table of contents) in the IntraGuide online help.

7.10.3 Hardware RequirementsThe IntraGuide software is designed to operate as an application under Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT.

A Pentium 90MHz or better is required with 32MB RAM and one available serial port.

Graphic settings for displaying the program should be 16-bit color or better. If the graphic display is set to 256 colors or less, some color distortion and image flashing may occur.

Page 219: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-65

7.10.4 ConnectionsCommunications from your computer to the Intraplex equipment is accomplished wiyh RS-232, using one of the COM ports on your computer.

The remote port is an RJ-11 jack on the MA-215 or MA-217B modules. Pin connections for the modules are shown in Table 7-25.

Connection to a PC can be established using an ordinary straight-through wired cable (a null modem cable or adapter is not necessary). However, when connecting the remote port to a modem for use as a dial-in connection to the equipment, use a null modem cable, which will provide a standard RS-232 DCE to DCE connection.

There is an adapter for connecting the MA-217B to a 9-pin serial port of a computer. Order part number 9557-2129 CM-10 Term Adapter DB-9/RJ11.

7.10.5 Serial ProtocolsThe default communications protocols for the CM-5 common module are:

• baud rate: 9600

• data bits: 7

• parity: odd

• stop bits: 1

Note: The settings can be changed, however for long-term ease of use it is recommended that the communications protocol remain at the system defaults.

7.10.6 Sample Configurations Using IntraGuideIntraGuide can control the functionality of most cards. The IntraGuide online help provides context-sensitive information for the operation of the IntraGuide interface. Figure 7-19 on page 7-66 illustrates the CM-5 configuration interface. The T1 signaling can be set to B8ZS or AMI. It also provides primary timing mode and loopback features.

Table 7-25 RJ-11 remote port pin connections for MA-215 and MA-217B module adapters

Connector Pin Description

1 RS-485 A lead

2 RS-232 transmit data (output)

3 No connection

4 RS-232 receive data (input)

5 RS-232 ground

6 RS-485 B lead

Page 220: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-66

Figure 7-19 CM-5 configuration display

The current condition of the CM-5 can be displayed in the status display shown in Figure 7-20. This display generates the same report as the manually entered ISiCL commands discussed previously in this section.

Page 221: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-67

Figure 7-20 CM-5 status display

IntraGuide provides support for numerous Intraplex channel modules. For example, Figure 7-21 shows the configuration controls for a DS-64NC Synchronous Data Module.

Page 222: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-68

Figure 7-21 DS-64NC General display

Figure 7-22 shows another example of IntraGuide’s controlling the testing configuration of the DS-64NC.

Page 223: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-69

Figure 7-22 DS-64NC Testing display

IntraGuide can also display the status of a channel module, such as the DS-64NC status display shown in Figure 7-23.

Page 224: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Remote Control OperationIntraGuide Software

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

7-70

Figure 7-23 DS-64NC Status display

There are many other channel modules that can be configured and tested using IntraGuide. See the IntraGuide Online Help for further information about IntraGuide channel module configurations and status displays.

Page 225: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Section 8

Specifications

What is in this section?8.1 T1 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

8.2 T1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

8.3 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

8.4 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

8.5 Remote Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

8.6 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

8.7 Alert and Alarm Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

8.8 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

8.9 Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

8.10 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

8.11 Signaling and Ringing Generator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

8.12 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

8.13 Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 226: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsT1 Outputs

8-2

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

8.1 T1 Outputs

8.2 T1 Inputs

Rate 1.544 Mbps � 30 ppm, using internal timing

Pulse shape Per ANSI T1.403-1995

Formats Extended superframe (ESF) per ANSI T1.403-1995and AT&T 62411 D4/superframe (SF) per AT&T 43801

Line codes Bipolar with 8-zero substitution (B8ZS)Alternate mark inversion (AMI)

Line Build Out Up to 655 feet from standard DSX or CSU LBO 0, -7.5, or -15dB

Output jitter Less than 0.05 UI per AT&T PUB 62411, using internal timing

Connector RJ-48C on the MA-215 module adapterDB-15P on the MA-216 module adapter

Rate 1.544 Mbps � 100 ppm (not loop or through timed)1.544 Mbps � 50 ppm, (loop or through timed)

Pulse shape Per ANSI T1.403-1995

Input impedance 100 ohms resistive (nominal)

Line code B8ZS or AMI

Frame format ESF or SF

Frame synchronization

Proprietary frame synchronization algorithm for high tolerance to transmission errors

Average reframe time 17.5 ms for ESF, 4.0 ms for SF

Robustness Mean time to lose frame at 10-3 Bit Error Rate:Greater than 10 hours for ESFGreater than 2 hours for SF

Burst error tolerance Greater than 2000 bit error burst for ESF and SF

Dynamic range +3 dB to -6 dB relative to the nominal DSX-1 level

Jitter tolerance Greater than 28 UI at 10 Hz, exceeds AT&T PUB 62411 for terminals

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 227: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsTiming

8-3

8.3 Timing

8.4 User Interface

Jitter attenuation Greater than 20 dB at 50 Hz, exceeds AT&T PUB 62411

Connector RJ-48C on the MA-215 module adapterDB-15P on the MA-217B module adapter

Primary Timing

Internal: 1.544 MHz, � 30 ppm

Loop: 1.544 MHz � 50 ppm

External: 1.544 MHz � 50 ppm from T1 station clock, or optional 8 kHz x N clock (N = 1 to 192) with RS-422 input

Through: 1.544 MHz � 50 ppm, for drop/insert operation

Fallback Timing Automatically enabled in case of primary timing failure. Smooth phase transition to fallback timing minimizes down line perturbations

Timing Output 1.544 Mbps RS-422 timing output to synchronize other equipment

Connector RJ-11s on the MA-215 and MA-216 module adapters

Alphanumeric Display Four-character alphanumeric display of T1 setup, timing, and link status, with a bi-level indicator signifying on/off status of displayed function

Indicators Power onNormalAlertAlarmTransmit outputReceive inputErrorsBipolar variationsOut-of-frameTiming modeLoopback onCPU failure

Switches Group selectFunction select and setAlarm cut-off

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 228: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsRemote Monitoring and Control

8-4

8.5 Remote Monitoring and Control

8.6 Diagnostics

8.7 Alert and Alarm Reporting

Functionality Permits status inquiries at system and channel level, and configuration of T1 and channel module parameters

Protocol Intraplex simple command language (ISiCL)

Interface RS-232C asynchronous

Connector RJ-11s on the MA-215 and MA-217B module adapters

Status Monitoring Constant monitoring of transmission, equipment, and timing, with alert and alarm reporting

Test Jacks Bantam jacks for T1 input/output signal, T1 input/output monitoring

Loopbacks T1 line loopback, T1 equipment loopback, payload loopback

Alarm Conditions

CPU failureAlarm at one or more channel modulesReceive signal present but out-of-frameLoss of transmission output

Alert ConditionsEquipment:

Transmission:

Timing:

Loopback activeAlert at one or more channel modulesSingle power supply failure (when two power supplies are installed)Alarm cut-off switch (ACO) activeLoss of receive signalReceiving yellow alarmLoss of primary timing (fallback timing active)

Alarm Relay Form C: one normally open and one normally closed contact

Alert Relay Form C: one normally open and one normally closed contact

Contact Rating 100 Volts, 100 mA (10 VA)

Connector 3RU shelves: Terminal strip on rear panel1RU shelves: DB-15S on rear panel

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 229: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsPerformance Monitoring

8-5

8.8 Performance Monitoring

8.9 Channel Modules

8.10 Power

Compliant with AT&T Pub 54016

Standard and enhanced performance parameters stored in 15 minute intervals over the most recent 24 hoursPerformance parameters reported over T1 Facility Data Link in response to network request messagesRS-232 interface allows interrogation of all data bins, or can obtain a summary report

Compliant with ANSI T1.403

Generates Performance Report Message (PRM) every second over the T1 Facility Data LinkRS-232 interface can accumulate and interrogate incoming and outgoing PRM data

Slot Assignment Physical slots and T1 time slots are unrelated - channel modules may be assigned to any available 64 kbps time slot(s)

Capacity ACS-163: 16 channel modulesACS-165: 16 channel modulesACS-166: 8 channel modules for each terminalACS-167: 3 channel modulesACS-168: 2 channel modulesACS-169: 3 channel modulesES-160: 18 channel modules

Connector On the rear panel of the multiplexerFor AC: 3-prong jackFor DC: Terminal strip (3RU shelves)

Consumption 2 watts for each CM-5 common module (one in a terminal multiplexer, two in a dual terminal or drop/insert multiplexer), plus channel module consumption

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 230: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsSignaling and Ringing Generator Inputs

8-6

8.10.1 Power Supply Modules for Three-Rack Unit (3RU) Shelf

8.10.2 Power Supply Modules for One-Rack-Unit (1RU) Shelf

8.11 Signaling and Ringing Generator Inputs

PS-60AC(standard)

Nominal Input Voltages:Input Voltage Range:Input Fuse:Output Power:

115 VAC or 230 VAC90 to 264 VAC2A (slow blow)50 Watts

PS-5024 Nominal Input Voltage:Input Voltage Range:Input Fuse:Output Power:

-24 VDC-20 to -36 VDC5A (slow blow)50 Watts

PS-5048 Nominal Input Voltage:Input Voltage Range:Input Fuse:Output Power:

-48 VDC-40 to -72 VDC5A (slow blow)50 Watts

PS-100AC Nominal Input Voltages:Input Voltage Range:Input Fuse:Output Power:

115 VAC or 230 VAC90 to 264 VAC2A (slow blow)100 Watts

PS-60AC(standardbut non-removable)

Nominal Input Voltages:Input Voltage Range:Input Fuse:Output Power:

115 VAC or 230 VAC90 to 264 VAC2A (slow blow)50 Watts

SignalingVoltage:

Fuse:

-60 VDC maximum2A Slow-blow, external (required)

Ringing GeneratorVoltage:

Current:

Fuse:

Biased to minus battery96 V RMS nominal500 mA RMS maximum0.5A Slow-blow, external (required)

Connector On rear panel: terminal strip (3RU), or DB-15S alarm connector (1RU)

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 231: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsEnvironmental

8-7

8.12 Environmental

8.13 Physical

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Temperature 0� - 50�C operating

Humidity 10% - 90% non-condensing

Height 5.25 inches (3RU)1.75 inches (1RU)

Width Compatible with EIA standard RS-310 19-inch equipment racks

Depth 14.75 inches from mounting plane, not including user-supplied connectors

Front Projection 0.75 inches from mounting plane, with front door closed

Weight 3RU: 11 lb. (5 kg) approximate, with no channel modules installed; 15 lb. (6.8 kg) typical when fully loaded1RU: 10 lb. (4.5 kg) approximate, with no channel modules installed; 11 lb. (5 kg) typical when fully loaded

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 232: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

SpecificationsPhysical

8-8

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 233: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Index

Numerics1RU shelves 1-43RU shelves 1-4

AACO 5-31ACS-160 Series

configurations 1-4features 1-2rear connectors 2-6unpacking 2-3

ACS-163 1-4front view 1-6rear view 1-8

ACS-165 1-4front view 1-7rear connectors 2-5rear view 1-9

ACS-166 1-4front view 1-7rear view 1-9

ACS-167 1-4front view 1-7rear view 1-9

ACS-168 1-4front view 1-8rear view 1-10

ACS-169 1-4front view 1-8rear view 1-10

ADDR 3-8, 7-5AIS alarm 3-28, 5-12alarm 5-11

ACO 5-31AIS 5-12BER 5-12check status 7-21

conditions 5-12connections 2-15cut-off switch 5-31receive lock 3-36specs 8-4STL 5-12, 5-13TXOUT 5-12

alert 5-11check status 7-21conditions 5-11specs 8-4

AMI 3-6, 3-24description 6-22

ATT_STAT? 7-44

BB8ZS 3-6, 3-24

description 6-23BAUD 3-9baud rate 7-10BER alarm 5-12binary digits 7-49

P codes 7-49S codes 7-49

BLNK 3-7, 5-7

Cchannel module

adding 4-11configuration 7-29description 6-18installation 4-12physical slots 4-6power 4-9receive timeslot 4-11remote 7-28set direction 4-4

Harris CorporationIntraplex Products

Page 234: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IndexI-2

set time slots 4-4specs 8-5status 7-28time slots 4-6transmit timeslot 4-11types 4-2

channel tests 5-23CM-5

advanced group menu 3-11diagram 3-12

basic group menu 3-2diagram 3-5

configuration 7-26default serial protocols 7-61description 6-5front view 1-11functional diagram 6-6indicators 1-13, 5-4, 6-12interface 1-10lock 7-19network

address 7-56configuration 7-55

parameters 7-26redundant 3-26

compatibility 3-27configure 3-27drop/insert mux 3-30installation 3-26remote control 3-29terminal mux 3-29

unlock 7-19CM-5TD 3-32

configure 7-48indicators 3-34, 7-51local control 3-34setup 3-33subaddress 3-33

CNFG 3-9, 3-28COMM 3-9, 7-55CONFIG? 7-35context-sensitive help 7-59control port 7-53CSU

ATT_STAT? 7-44configuration 3-24connecting 2-9CSU_STAT? 7-41

line statistics 7-39, 7-40REGISTERS? 7-45REMOTE_STAT? 7-41set 3-6using 3-2

CSU_STAT? 7-41CUST 3-15

Ddata module 4-2delay capability

ISiCL 7-48, 7-49P codes 7-48S codes 7-49

demultiplexing 6-8DIAG 3-8, 5-10diagnostics 5-5, 5-10

specs 8-4drop/insert mux

description 6-2, 6-26dual terminal mux

description 6-24dynamic range 8-2

EEIB 3-15environmental specs 8-7EqLB 3-7, 5-6equipment loopback 5-6ESF 3-6, 3-24

diagram 6-21excess jitter 5-8, 5-10extended superframe 6-20external timing

MA-215 pin assignments 2-13

wiring 2-12

Ffactory

defaults 5-10reset 5-10

FExt 3-13fiber optical interface adapter. See OIA

FInt 3-13FLoo 3-13format

frame 3-24line code 3-24

FRAM 3-14frame

configuration 3-24framing

description 6-20ESF 6-20SF 6-20

FSec 3-13FTIM 3-7, 3-13

GGROUP

description 6-10group menu

advanced 3-11diagram 3-12

basic 3-2diagram 3-5

Iindicators 1-13

blinking 5-7CM-5 5-4CM-5TD 7-51power supply 6-15specs 8-3timing 3-17

input impedance 8-2in-service tests 5-21IntraGuide

CM-5 configuration 7-62CM-5 status 7-62connections 7-61DS-64 configuration 7-63DS-64 status 7-64DS-64 testing 7-63features 7-59hardware 7-60online help 7-59sample configuration 7-61setup 7-60

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 235: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Index I-3

ISiCLaddress 7-12ATT_STAT? 7-44commands 7-15comment 7-17CONFIG? 7-35CSU_STAT? 7-41P codes 7-48parameter 7-16REGISTERS? 7-45REMOTE_STAT? 7-41S codes 7-49SET 7-27SRVC 7-48STATUS? 7-23subaddress 7-13

JJBUF 3-13jitter

attenuation 8-2buffer depth 5-10excess 5-8, 5-10tolerance 8-2

Lline build out 2-10line code

configuration 3-24line loopback 5-6LnLB 3-7, 5-6LOF 3-28loopback

changing 5-7descriptions 6-9equipment 5-6line 5-6payload 5-6T1 5-5

LOS 3-28LPBK 3-7, 5-5

MMA-213L

specifications 3-39MA-213M

specifications 3-39MA-215 2-7

and CSU 2-11connectors 2-6pin assignments 2-11SW1 2-8

MA-217Band CSU 2-12connectors 2-6pin assignments 2-11

microprocessor 6-9module

adapter description 6-18channel 4-2

adding 4-11configuration 7-29description 6-18duplex 4-3installation 4-12physical slots 4-6point-to-multipoint 4-3point-to-point 4-3receive timeslot 4-11remote 7-28set direction 4-4set timeslots 4-4simplex 4-3specs 8-5status 7-28timeslots 4-6transmit timeslot 4-11

data 4-2power supply 6-14program audio 4-2video 4-3voice 4-2

module adapter 6-18motherboard connections 6-3multiplexing 6-5

NNetwork 7-54network

address 7-5network communications 7-54

drop/insert 7-58point-to-point 7-58settings 7-55sub-networks 7-57topologies 7-57

NLLB 3-7, 5-7NPLB 3-7, 5-7NRVT 3-28

OOIA

alert indicators 3-36card address 3-38environmental 3-39external timing input 3-39installation 3-36operating distance 3-39output power 3-39P code 3-38power consumption 3-39remote

control interface 3-38status messages 3-38

S code 3-38sensitivity 3-39specifications 3-39ST-type 3-39SW1 3-37switch settings 3-37system gain 3-39wavelength 3-39

optic interface adapter. See OIAout-of-service tests 5-22

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 236: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

IndexI-4

PP codes 7-48PaLB 3-7, 5-6PAR 3-9parity 7-10password 7-20payload loopback 5-6PC connection

COM port 7-61DB-9 to RJ11 adapter 7-61MA-215 7-61MA-217B 7-61

PDE 3-6, 3-24physical specs 8-7PLL 3-15power

AC connections 2-18applying 2-19channel modules 4-9DC connections 2-17, 2-18specs 8-5wiring 2-15

power consumption 8-5power supply

1RU specs 8-63RU specs 8-6functional diagram 6-17indicators 6-15modules 6-14redundant 4-10

installing 2-3testing 5-29, 6-15

PRIM 3-14program audio module 4-2

RR RX 3-15RATE 3-9Rcpu 3-15receive

clock 5-9lock 5-9

REDN 3-27redundant

CM-5 3-26power supply 4-10

redundant CM-5compatibility 3-27configure 3-27drop/insert mux 3-30installation 3-26remote control 3-29terminal mux 3-29

redundant power supplyinstalling 2-3

reframe time 8-2REGISTERS? 7-45remote control specs 8-4remote port

configure 7-5MA-215 pin assignments

2-14parameters 7-8wiring 2-13

REMOTE_STAT? 7-41ringing generator 8-6RS-422 7-53RSGN 3-13RTIM 3-13RVRT 3-28RVU1 3-8, 5-8Rx11 3-7, 5-8RxLK 3-8RxLk 5-9RxYI 3-7, 5-8

SS codes 7-49, 7-50SET 7-27SET/NEXT display 6-10SF 3-6, 3-24

diagram 6-21shelf

1RU 1-43RU 1-4

signaling specs 8-6SIO 3-9, 7-8

select 7-8SRVC 7-48STATUS? 7-23STL alarm 5-12, 5-13sub-networks 7-57superframe diagram 6-21

SWCH 3-28system check-out 5-13

TT1

framing 6-20input specs 8-2line coding 6-22line driver 6-7line receiver 6-7loopback 5-5test jacks 5-20transmit 6-19

Tcty 5-10TD-1 3-33TDLY 3-8terminal mux

description 6-24test jacks 5-20testing

channel tests 5-23drop/insert mux 5-17

indicators 5-18, 5-19in-service 5-21out-of-service 5-22overview 5-2power supply 5-29, 6-15terminal mux 5-14

indicators 5-16troubleshooting 5-26

guidelines 5-27procedure 5-28

TIME 3-7, 3-16time delay

common module 3-32using RS-232 7-51using RS-422 7-53

timingdetermining modes 3-19fallback 3-17frame-synchronized 3-22primary 3-17source 3-16specs 8-3status indicators 3-17synchronized 3-21transmit functions 6-7

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 237: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

Index I-5

timing outMA-215 pin assignments

2-13TLBO 3-6Topt 3-15transmit

activity alarm 3-36clock 5-9level alarm 3-36lock 5-9timing functions 6-7

troubleshooting 5-26guidelines 5-27procedure 5-28

TSEL 3-6, 3-24TSLT 3-9Tx11 3-7, 5-8TxLK 3-8TxLk 5-9TXOUT alarm 5-12TxRx 3-8, 5-9TxYI 3-7, 5-8TXYL 3-14TYPE 3-14

Vvideo module 4-3voice module 4-2

Wwiring procedures 2-4

XXsJt 3-7, 3-8, 5-8, 5-10

YYEL 3-28

T1 Access Server Installation & Operation Manual Harris CorporationIssue 1, October 2000 Intraplex Products

Page 238: ACS-160 V1.1 Harris

������������� ������ �������� �� ���������������������������������� � !"#$�%&�&

�'� �()%)��%���&&��*����(� �������+'�����,����---,.��������,'�����,���

������'��/&&&!��������������

�����������������